Home

Device Driver User Manual 4Motion BTS and Mini

1. Parameter Range Default Tx Power dBm Depends on ODU type The upper limit is set by The maximum Tx ports only the Maximum Tx Power supported by the ODU supported by the ODU The control range for all ODUs is 10dBm except to the 1x1 ODUs in the 2 3 and 2 5 GHz bands whose control range is 6dBm This includes ODU 2300 2360 000N 36 1x1 N 0 ODU 2496 2602 000N 36 1x1 N 0 ODU 2590 2690 000N 36 1x1 N 0 Antenna Page Antenna Product Type a list of antennas Default 2 Port DS Description String 1 to 32 characters null Specification Number of Ports 1 8 1 Electrical Down Tilt deg 90 0 to 90 0 in steps of 0 1 0 Installation Mechanical Down Tilt deg 90 0 to 90 0 in steps of 0 1 0 Heading deg 0 359 0 Cable Loss dB 0 20 in steps of 0 1 0 5 Location Longitude deg Ill mmm a 000 000 N Ill is between 000 and 179 mmm is between 000 and 999 ais E or W Latitude deg Ill mmm a 000 000 E Ill is between 000 and 89 mmm is between 000 999 aisNors Tower Height m 0 500 0 GPS Page Configured GPS Type E Trimble Trimble E None Almanac Usable Time Hours 0 4320 720 Ephemeris Usable Time Hours 0 168 4 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Power Feeder Page per entry AU Slot Number 1 4 7 9 None None AU P
2. Parameter Range Default Agent Circuit ID Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS Not Set ID NAS IP ASCCI Agent Circuit ID ASCII Bin Fr Full NAl Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID For ASCII Agent Circuit ID enter the ID stringin null the text box uo to 32 characters For ASCII Bib Fr enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces Agent Remote ID Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS Not Set ID NAS IP ASCCI Agent Remote ID ASCII Bin Fr Full NAI Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID Binary ASCIl Agent Remote ID For ASCII Agent Remote ID enter the ID string null in the text box uo to 32 characters For ASCII Bib Fr enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces Agent Subscriber ID Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS Not Set ID NAS IP ASCCI Agent Subscriber ID ASCII Bin Fr Full NAI Domain Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID For ASCII Agent Subscriber ID enter the ID null string in the text box uo to 32 characters For ASCII Bib Fr enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces SFA Page PHS Rules Tab Enable PHS Support Enable Disable check box Disable Name String 1 4 30 characters null Field Value null Mask Value bits null Verify Value E No No E Yes Size Value Bytes E 0 20 null SFA Page Classification Rules Tab Name String 1 30 characters null PHS Rule Name Available PHS Rule Names or None None Priority 0
3. 5 2 4 4 IP Routing Parameter Description Destination The destination host or network IP address for the route Mask The net mask for the route Next Hop The next hop IP address for the route 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard A single empty entry is presented allowing to define one static route it is recommended to define the default route in order not to lose connectivity with the device after restoring the file on the device To add more routes click on the Add button Click on the Delete button to remove a selected entry from the table 5 2 4 5 Sectors Sector no Read only The sector number Sector Heading The sector heading the center angle of the sector in degrees The range is from 0 to 359 Sector name The sector name A descriptive string of up to 32 printable characters Click Next to open the next screen of the wizard 5 2 5 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 TA i Enupmont Manager x E Temelate manager x EDZI Twin Site Creation le cores ek a Bel Be acme Jeer Je gas Kmieggs L mssesn E certare tesi Bie O ven Figure 5 4 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 e HN If the connectivity mode of the source site is Transparent this screen is not applicable The third screen of the wizard includes the following par
4. The Classification Rule Destination Address Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Destination Address parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules IP Destination Number The index of the IP Destination IP Destination Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule IP Destination Address Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The IP Destination address enabled for the classification rule IP Destination Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP Destination addresses Enable IP Destination Indicates whether the use of an associated IP Destination address is enabled for Classifer the classification rule 4 4 2 4 7 Classification Rule Source Port Tab L Gesin Ride Destination Address Classfication Ride Source Port L Gesi sien Ride Destination Port Classiication Rule Customer VLANID Jl eau X CH Revest Rule Number Rule Number Source Port Number E O From Ore Zo o 0 Enable DCH Source Port L
5. Parameter Description Output Number The Output Alarm Number 1 3 Refer to the table below for details on the mapping of Output Alarm Numbers to pins in the ALRM OUT connector Name The name of the output alarm A descriptive string of up to 256 characters State Indicates the state of the output alarm On or Off Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the on and off options The mapping of the ALRM OUT connector s pins to alarms is Pin Number Corresponding Alarm Number 1 FIX 2 N C 14 N O 1 11 FIX 12 N C 13 N O 2 23 FIX 24 N C 25 N O 3 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device 6 5 3 Time Tab Site Page The Time tab enables defining the time and date parameters of the site For BTS equipment it also enables defining the synchronization and GPS related settings for the site Site Genera Dey Contact Time Time And Data UIC Ime and Oste else 7 e vo Ia Local Tine Zoe w ls oo Dryight Saving Time w 7705 Local Time and Date 4 97 Lie d Read GPS Tine e jy Rand GPS Time at or os Synehraneation Ten Number of Ssteltes for Sync Loss La E Mrieaan later d Sateites for Ze Return C2 if Stop AL transm ssion after Maximum Tepe in Moldewer State ms Cw lo Done Figure 6 7 Site Page Time Tab BTS The Time tab includes t
6. RT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all RT VR services which when exceeded triggers an RT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil NRT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all NRT VR services which when exceeded triggers an NRT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil UGS The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all UGS services which when exceeded triggers a UGS service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description ERT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all ERT VR services which when exceeded triggers an ERT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil Alarm Thresholds for noise and interference level Uplink Median Noise The uplink median noise level represents the median value of the noise floor histogram Ir the measured uplink median noise level exceeds the value calculated as the target noise and interference level for the PUSC Zone see Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab on page 238 plus the value of the Uplink Median Noise parameter an excessiv
7. The maximum cell radius in km The available values are 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 4 4 3 2 2 Feedback Allocations Tab Ranging Feedback A dee Neighivor Advertisers Power Control Management Harnduver Neyotatunat TES Trigger Setup QoS O IR Coma Allecabons Period Frames EN lt Refresh ll vi Save Figure 4 28 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Feedback Allocations Tab The Feedback Allocations parameter is Parameter Description IR CDMA Allocation Period The period of IR CDMA allocations in frames The available options are 1 2 4 6 8 10 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Cl Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 2 3 Neighbor Advertisement Tab Ses C Rado Basic Reto ndvenced E 1 Connecthity Basie C Connectivity Advanced Dae Been Feedba age edu Siet Power Contra Management Handover Neystistinat TES Aaen Setup QuS C Neighbor Advertisement Brosdcest interval s Figure 4 29 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Neighbor Advertisement Tab The Neighbor Advertisement parameter is Parameter Description Neighbor Advertisement The periodic NBRADV transmission interval in seconds Broadcast Interval The range is from 0 to 100 in steps of 0 1 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized AS
8. Vendor Specific Information Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode Option 43 Name string Up to 64 characters Vendor Specific Information Value Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode Option 43 Value string Up to 64 characters Server Host Name The server host name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 64 characters Client Boot File Name The client boot file name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 128 characters Service Group Type Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The Service Group s type IP VPWS QinQ VPWS Transparent VPWS Mapped Secondary DNS Server Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode IP Address of the second DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Interim Interval Min Not applicable if Accounting Mode see above is set to None The default interval in seconds for Accounting Interim reports to be used if Acct Interim Interval is not received from the AAA server Value 0 means interim reports are deactivated unless Acct Interim Interval is sent by the AAA server in Access Accept messages
9. 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Synchronization Number of Satellites acquired Read only The number of satellites currently acquired by the GPS 6 8 2 4 Power Feeder Page applicable only for Indoor BTS The PIU can support a maximum current of 58 A 40 5 VDC In certain installations with a relatively high number of ODUs this current may not be sufficient to power the shelf and all the ODUs In such installations the ODU Power Feeder is used as an additional power source providing power 48 VDC to ODUs It transfers transparently all signals between the AU and the ODU while injecting DC power received from an external source Each ODU Power Feeder unit can serve up to four ODUs 3 Power Feeder AU Slot Number AU Port Number Figure 6 25 Power Feeder Page The Power Feeder table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Unit Number Read only The Power Feeder Unit Number 1 4 Port Number Read only The Power Feeder Port Number 1 4 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description AU Slot Number The Slot Number of the AU to which the Power Feeder Port is connected 1 4 7 9 or None AU Port Number
10. Maximum DL The maximal number of downlink retransmissions of an HARQ sub burst for Retransmissions this service The range is 0 15 The default is 5 Maximum UL The maximal number of uplink retransmissions of an HARQ sub burst for this Retransmissions service The range is 0 15 The default is 5 Paging Cycle Per Service type policy parameter in PA used to determine Paging Cycle value in frames for the MS during IM Entry and MS Paging The range is from 6 to 1000 The default is 60 Paging Offset Per Service type parameter in PA used to determine Paging Offset value in frames for the MS during IM Entry and Paging Paging Offset value shall not exceed the chosen Paging Cycle value The range is from 0 to 1000 The default is 0 Traffic Idle Period Traffic Idle period in milliseconds per Service type The range is from 50 to 60000 in steps of 50 The default is 300 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 256 BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Downlink Basic Link The downlink basic rate The default is QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The Advanced
11. Vendor Specific Information Value Option 43 Value string Up to 64 characters The DHCP Function Editor for Relay mode includes the following parameters Parameter Description External DHCP Server IP The IP address of the external DHCP server Address Enable Relay Agent Mark to enable Relay Agent Information Option 82 All following parameters are Information applicable only if Relay Agent Information is enabled Relay Agent Information Parameters Enable Unicast Relay Agent Information Indicates whether the Unicast parameter is enabled or disabled Enable RADIUS Attributes Indicates whether RADIUS Attributes sub option 7 82 is enabled or disabled RADIUS Attribute Messages applicable only if Enable RADIUS Attributes is enabled Service Type Indicates whether Service Type attribute 6 is enabled or disabled Vendor Specific Indicates whether Vendor Specific attribute 26 is enabled or disabled Session Timeout Indicates whether Session Timeout attribute 27 is enabled or disabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Agent Circuit ID Suboption 1 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Circuit ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII B
12. E Marking Actions 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 6 6 4 1 HM QoS Marking Classifiers Marking Actions The Marking Actions table lists the class maps that define the DSCP and or VLAN priority bits to be applied for signaling and management traffic originating from the NPU that match relevant criteria The Marking Actions table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Action ID Read only The system generated auto sequential ID number Flag Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry Defines the type of QoS parameters to be applied appropriate QoS handling of the relevant flow The option are DSCP Priority and DSCP amp Priority DSCP Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry The DSCP value to be applied for this class map 0 63 Priority Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry The VLAN priority value to be applied foro this class map 0 7 where 0 is the lowest and 7 is the highest The Marking Actions section also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Action Adds a new entry to the Marking Actions table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Marking Actions table An Action ID that is associated to a QoS Marking Classif
13. E Print Preview Displays a preview of the graph before printing E Page Setup To open the Page Setup dialog box 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter Tasks Chapter 8 Tasks In This Chapter Performance Collection Task on page 277 not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Backup Configuration Task on page 282 Restore Configuration Task on page 285 Software Upgrade Task on page 288 File Data Aging Task on page 294 CLI Task on page 295 Mass Neighboring Task on page 298 Multiple Configuration Template Based Task on page 301 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Performance Collection Task 8 1 Performance Collection Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE The Performance Collection Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility The performance data collection and storage feature in the devices see also Performance Tab on page 161 enables collection and storage of selectable groups of counters at fixed intervals of 15 minutes The device stores the performance data files collected during the last 24 hours up to 96 xml files The Performance Collection task enables the collection of stored performance data files from specific equipment Only files that do not exist in the database will be retrieved gt To open the Performance Collection Task Editor I
14. Figure 6 26 Antenna Page Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Antennas List includes the following read only parameters for each defined antenna Parameter Description Antenna Number The index number of the antenna Antenna Product Type The type of antenna Product ID Select an entry to open the Antenna Parameters Editor allowing you to view modify the selected antenna parameters The following buttons are available below the Antennas List Parameter Description Add Adds a new entry to the Antennas List The Antenna Parameters Editor will open with default values enabling to define the parameters for the new antenna After completing the definition process and pressing Apply the new antenna will be added to the list Its number will be the first free number The list can include up to 28 antennas for an Indoor BTS and up to 24 antennas for an Outdoor BTS Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Antennas List o IMPORTANT l An associated antenna specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector Page on page 263 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Antennas Parameters Editor section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Ante
15. Primary Server IP Address inn ao pebe 1 v Stee Dene f Figure 6 27 AAA Page The AAA page comprises two sections the AAA Client Generic Parameters and the AAA Client parameters The AAA Client Generic Parameters are Parameter Description ASN GW NAS ID The unique identifier of the ASN GW NAS Sent in Access Request message only if configured Should be in FQDN format Up to 64 characters GMT Time Zone Offset The time zone offset in seconds from GMT at the NAS The range is from 0 to 86400 seconds 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment Defines how to transfer VLAN ID between R3 and R6 E MSB Shift a When transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side the binary value of the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV will be copied and pasted as most significant bits in R6 TLV b When transferring classifier VID value from R6 to R3 the binary value of the 12 the most significant bits in R6 TLV will be copied and pasted as the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV E LSB The whole 16 bit value of the relevant TLV will be transferred without any change when transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side and from R6 to R3 The AAA Client parameters are Parameter Description AAA Name The name of the AA
16. Select an entry to open the Classification Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule The following buttons are available below the table Parameter Description Add Classification Rule Adds a new entry to the Classificaton Rules table and opens the Classification Rule Parameters Editor allowing to configure parameters of the new rule 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 208 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Classificaton Rules table The Classification Rule Parameters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Rule Identifiers Name The name of the classification rule A string of 1 30 characters The name of an existing rule cannot be modified PHS Rule Name The Packet Header Suppression PHS rule name associated with the classification rule or null for no PHS Rule Specify the PHS rulename if you want to perform PHS for this flow Priority The priority level assigned to the classification rule The range is 0 255 Type The rule s type L2 or L3 The type of an existing rule cannot be modified Classification Rule Parameters Layer 2 applicable only for L2 rules Customer VLAN ID The Customer VLAN ID value to be assigned to the classification rule The range is 1 4094 Layer
17. Service Grows a x D Revert Interface Number US Interface Number Service Interface Name a L 7 Service Interface Name O desertion O Tyre Ke Tunnel Destination 1P O Enable Checksum D D mtu see pute O Service VLAN ID O Defek Gateway Pr Address LI Subnet Mask x gt Refresh v swe A Figure 4 5 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The Service Interfaces table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Interface Number The index number of the interface 1 10 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Service Interface Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The Service Interfaces Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Interface Number The index number of the interface 1 10 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Service Interface Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Description A brief description of the service interface A string of up to 70 characters Type Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN QinQ
18. TCP UDP Source Port From 1 fo 65 534 Layer3 Enable TCP UDP Destination Port G Enable 1P Tos TCP UDP Destination Port From 1 S To 65 534 gt TOS Range From o To 0 3 E Refresh v Apply Done Figure 6 36 SFA Page Classification Rules Tab Upper Section 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW SFA Classification Rule Parameters Layer2 Layer Customer VLAN ID Layer3 Gi Enable 1P TOS G Enable TCP UDP Destination Port TCPJUDP Destination Port From 1 Ta 65 534 2 TOS Range From Bm lo g TOS Mask R s G Enable IP Protocol IP Protocol 1 g Enable IP Source Classifier IP Source Address IP Source Mask Enable IP Destination Classifier IP Destination Address IP Destination Mask BeA 2 Refresh v Apply Done Figure 6 37 SFA Page Classification Rules Tab Lower Section The Classification Rules tab includes the Classification Rules table and the Classification Rule Parameters Editor section The Classification Rules table includes the following read only parameters for each existing rule Parameter Description Classification Rule Number The index number of the Classification rule An auto sequential number starting from 1 up to a maximum of 100 rules Name The name of the rule Type The type of the rule L2 or L3
19. TFTP IP Address The IP address of the TFTP server on which the file to be downloaded is stored This address is set by default to the management system s internal TFTP server IP address but can be changed to any external TFTP server IP address If you select two or three options then each action will take place only after the successful completion of the previous action selecting only the Download to Shadow and Set as Operational Version options is not a valid combination The selected action s will be performed on the devices included in the Select Equipment section Click on the Add button to open equipment selector for adding devices to the table Click on the Remove button to delete selected entries from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task 8 4 3 AU Software Upgrade not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Task Name software upgrade Software Download Activity AU Software Upgrade Software Upgrade Settings Other Settings L Download To Shadow L Delete AU version from NPU L Switch Over File Name si TFTP IP Address 10 10 187 116 Select Equipment Region BTS Name Site IP AU Slot No AU Opera AU Shadow AU Curre EMS 2 10 10 14 4 16e Macr 10 10 14 2 Invalid Figure 8 7 Software Upgrade Task Editor AU Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade S
20. Authentication Thresholds Suspended EAP Process Suspended EAP authentification process threshold It is used to set an alarm The range is 0 10000 Active MSs The threshold for the number of MSs in active operation state not Idle served by the BS Exceeding this threshold sets the alarm Excessive MS number The range is 0 1024 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Maximum EAP Rounds The threshold for the number of EAP rounds in one direction in the same EAP session When this threshold is exceeded alarm is set This threshold may be used to protect the system from hazard EAP sessions with extreme number of messaging round trips The range is 0 100 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled 6 10 3 2 Connectivity Advanced Page The Connectivity node s Advanced page includes the following tabs E Connectivity Advanced Page ID IP Mapping Tab E Connectivity Advanced Page QoS Marking Rules Tab E Connectivity Advanced Page Keep Alive Tab 6 10 3 2 1 Connectivity Advanced Page ID IP Mapping Tab The ID IP Mapping tab enables defining entries in the ID IP Mapping table 4 Advanced 0 0 2 0 12 148 TD IP Mapping QoS Marking Rides Keep Alve ID IP Mapping Neighbor 65 ID Neighbor BS IP
21. Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Data Delivery Scheduling Type for R6 An R6 parameter entry in the lookup table specifying the data delivery type service type UGS RT VR NRT VR BE ERT VR ertPS or ANY Priority for R6 An R6 parameter entry in the lookup table specifying the traffic priority 0 7 or ANY Use Media Flow Type If enabled checked the service lookup function will try to match the Service Flow Media Flow Type with the Media Flow Type entry see below If disabled the service lookup function will ignore the Media Flow Type Media Flow Type An R6 parameter entry in the lookup table that is relevant only if the Use Media Flow Type option is enabled A string of up to 32 characters Use Min Reserved Traffic Rate If enabled checked the service lookup function will try to match the Service Flow Min Reserved Traffic Rate with the Min Reserved Traffic Rate entry see below If disabled the service lookup function will ignore the Min Reserved Traffic Rate Min Reserved Traffic Rate for R6 An internal R6 profile parameter specifying the minimum reserved traffic rate in Kbps Applicable only for relevant data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than Max Sustained Traffic Rate The range is 0 40000 A value of 1 indicates that the parameter is not used Use
22. Marking Rule Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the Marking Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The QoS Marking Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the rule 1 20 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Note that default Rules Number 1 and 2 are pre configured in the devices These number should not be used in Add Rows to Tables templates Marking Rule Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the Marking Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Rule Applied on Interface Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The type of interface for which the bearer plane QoS rule is defined Internal R4 R6 tunnel External R1 or ANY Service Flow Data Delivery Type Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The type of service provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR or ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The traffic priority provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule 0 7 or ANY Servi
23. Serial Number Read only The serial number of the ODU enclosure 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description External Cavity Filter Check to indicate the existence of an external cavity filter Existence 6 8 2 2 2 Ports Configuration The Ports Configuration table includes the following parameters for each ODU port Parameter Description Tx Power dBm The required Tx power at the specified ODU Port in dBm Applicable only for Tx Rx ports Port 1 ina 1x1 ODU Ports 1 and 3 in a 4x2 ODU In other Rx ports this parameter is set to 0 0 and is read only The actually available range depends on ODU Type The upper limit is set by the Maximum Tx Power supported by the ODU The control range for all ODUs is 10dBm except to the 1x1 ODUs in the 2 3 and 2 5 GHz bands whose control range is 6dBm This includes ODU 2300 2360 000N 36 1x1 N 0 ODU 2496 2602 000N 36 1x1 N 0 ODU 2590 2690 000N 36 1x1 N O HW version The hardware version of the ODU card connected to this port HW revision The hardware revision of the ODU card connected to this port HPA Card Indicates whether the port is connected to an HPA card installed not installed HPA HW Version The hardware version of the HPA connected to this port relevant only if an HPA card is installed HC08 SW Version The software version of t
24. The valid range is 0 none or 5 1600 minutes Vid Map Start and Vid Map End Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The start and end value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping End value cannot be lower than Start value None of the value within the range shall overlap with any existing infrastructue host interfaces VLAN IDs None of the value within the range shall overlap with VID mapping ranges of other existing Service Groups 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 3 QoS Marking Page Brem ASW C Service Group ae eee 5 Service Profie acs X gt Revert Rule Warte GEERS pT N Pde Number KA C Maring Ride Name I Rude eebe on Interface x Service Flow Data Delvery Type E O Service Pow Traffic Prioeky wi L 7 Service Flow Mocha Flow Type GB outer OSCP Martin O mu 10 Preeky Marking v O Rue Status v z Refresh v Save I J Figure 4 7 The ASN GW Template QoS Marking Page Add Rows to Tables Template The QoS Marking table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the rule 1 20 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Note that default Rules Number 1 and 2 are pre configured in the devices These number should not be used in Add Rows to Tables templates
25. pgealL vs AAAA Figure 4 14 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Port Tab The Classification Rule Source Port tab is applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The Classification Rule Source Port table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Source Port parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules Source Port Number The index of the Source Port Source Port Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule The Classification Rule Source Port Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Source Port parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules Source Port Number TThe index of the Source Port Source Port Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule From To Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Source Port is enabled The range of values From To of the source ports from the lowest value to the hi
26. Applicable only for IP in IP service interfaces Indicates whether or not the tunnel checksum feature is enabled yes or no 6 9 2 2 Service Groups Tab The Services Groups tab enables viewing modifying the parameters of existing service group It also enables adding new service groups up to a maximum of 10 and removing service groups A service group is a group of MSs that are served by the same service provider or service flows that belong to the same service class The following service group types are supported IP This type of service group is used only for IP CS flows Once service group is configured as type IP additional IP allocation configuration is also required such as DHCP mode IP pool IP Subnet etc This type of service group must be associated with either IP IP encapsulated IP packets or VLAN type of R3 service interface An IP service group can be configured to support time based or volume and time based accounting In addition an IP service group can be configured to support direct communication between MSs belonging to the service group VPWS Transparent This type of service group is used only for VLAN CS flows Once service group is configured as VPWS Transparent type IP allocation configuration is not required This type of service group is not associated with any R3 service interface as vlan tagged MS traffic is transferred transparently on the on the R3 interface A VPWS Transparent service gr
27. Control Tab The Control tab includes the following options Parameter Description Last Reset Reason Read only The reason for the last reset of the AU Possible reasons include Unknown Health Monitoring Failed User Initiated Configuration Failure Internal Errors Shutdown Operation The type of operation to be performed Normal Operation Shutdown disable power to card or Reset The Shutdown Power AU to ODU section enables control of the power from each port The available options for each of the 4 ports are Shutdown or No Shutdown normal operation 6 8 2 External not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Equipment node includes the following pages E ODU Node with ODU Page for each of the existing created ODU entities 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW da Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment E GPS Page E Power Feeder Page applicable only for Indoor BTS E Antenna Page In addition from the navigation tree you can create new ODU entities or delete an existing ODU entity 6 8 2 1 Creating Deleting an ODU gt To create a new ODU 1 Right click the ODU sub node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New ODU window ODU Mandatory Parameters ODU type ODU 2300 2360 000N 36 1x1 N 0 v ODU Number oDU2 Lee Figure 6 22 New ODU Window 2 Inthe New ODU window selec
28. IP Interface Page on page 145 IP Routing Page on page 148 QoS Marking Rules Page on page 149 ACL Page on page 151 E Management Page on page 159 E Equipment Shelf Power Supply Page applicable only for Indoor BTS on page 168 NPU Page on page 169 AU Slot Page not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 174 External not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW ODU Page on page 179 GPS Page on page 182 Power Feeder Page applicable only for Indoor BTS on page 183 Antenna Page on page 184 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Introduction to Device Management E ASN GW AAA Page on page 188 QoS Marking Page on page 202 Service Group Page on page 190 SFA Page on page 204 Service Profile on page 210 ASN GW Keep Alive Page on page 216 E BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW node per specific BS sub node Radio Node Radio Basic Page on page 222 Oo Radio Advanced Page on page 235 Connectivity Node Connectivity Basic Page on page 247 Connectivity Advanced Page on page 250 Services Page on page 255 HM Site Sector not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Node per Site Sector Site Sect
29. MS MS Loopback Applicable only for IP Service Groups Indicates whether MS MS loopback is enabled or disabled for the service interface VID Mapping Range Start Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The start value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping None of the value within the range shall overlap with any existing infrastructue host interfaces VLAN IDs None of the value within the range shall overlap with VID mapping ranges of other existing Service Groups End Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The end value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping Cannot be lower than Start value None of the value within the range shall overlap with any existing infrastructue host interfaces VLAN IDs None of the value within the range shall overlap with VID mapping ranges of other existing Service Groups Accounting Accounting Mode Accounting mode for the service interface None No accounting support Time based The ASN GW send RADIUS Accounting Start Stop Requests The ASN GW shall also send Interim Accounting requests to AAA server using RADIUS Accounting Interim messages on a preconfigured or negotiated interval AAA server can send negotiated time interval in Access Accept message If the defined value see Interim Interval below is zero and there is no Acct Interim Interval in Access Accept interim updates should be deactivated Volume and time based Applicable only for IP Service Groups Fu
30. Shadow SW verson Number Currer Running SW Source Martenanea Connectiity TP Address 192 168 0 1 Mask 299 255 29 Next Hop 0 0 0 0 li gt Bech wi An Core Kc Figure 6 20 AU Slot Page Card Properties Tab The Required section enables viewing editing the required properties of the AU card that should be installed in the slot Parameter Description Type The required AU type In the current release only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable The Installed section displays read only information about the actual properties of the Installed card or AU not detected Parameter Description Type The AU type AU 4x4 Modem or AU not detected 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment In addition the following read only AU card parameters are displayed in the Card Properties tab Parameter Description Serial Number The serial number of the AU card HW Version Number The hardware version of the AU card HW Revision Number The hardware revision number Boot SW Version Number The boot software version IF Version Number The IF version number IF Revision Number The IF revision number Operational SW Version Number The version of the default software image used for rebooting the AU after system reset Shadow SW Version Number The version
31. The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Total Uplink Duration The total duration of the uplink in a frame in slots one slot equals 3 symbols To avoid BS BS interference the ul dl allocation must be identical in all BSs ina geographical region The range is 4 7 for bandwidth of 5 or 10MHz 3 5 for bandwidth of 7MHz After each change in the Bandwidth parameter the value must be configured to a proper value Map Major Groups The major groups allocated to the BS for maps transmission as indicated by the selection of the corresponding checkboxes If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant grayed out If Segment Number is 0 then bit 0 should be set checked If Segment Number is 1 then bit 2 should be set checked If Segment Number is 2 then bit 4 should be set checked Basic Map Repetition The basic repetition used in the transmission of the maps using QPSK 1 2 The available options are 1 2 4 and 6 1 means no repetitions Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 31 Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 Minimum Size The initial size in symbols of the f
32. can be loaded only to a site with the specified BTS Number Site ID which must be unique in the network In case the user enters an existing BTS Number the system prompts him to correct the mistake or to confirm the entered number The later is applicable when preparing a file for an already discovered site 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard 5 2 4 5 2 4 1 Click Next to open the next screen of the wizard Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 2 erer EC ET E TEE Gil Twin Site Creation Ske Location e o0 co m i so i C moe w EC an Location InSkeandRack Cid EEN a m Connectivity Oewer Kapen MIANO terns management 1 address NRG Destination Mmk Net Hop ea Server 10 10 107 117 User admin Figure 5 3 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 2 The second screen of the wizard includes the following sections E Site Properties E Site Location E Connectivity E IP Routing E Sectors Site Properties BTS Name The name of the BTS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters BTS Location The address of the BTS e g 21 Main Street 2nd Floor An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 70 characters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW er Device Driver User
33. ccceeeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 241 Figure 6 52 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab 243 Figure 6 53 Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab NeERREENEEEREENEENEEEEEENEEESEEEENEEEEChEEEDEN 246 Figure 6 54 Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Tab 248 Figure 6 55 Connectivity Basic Page Authentication Tab 249 Figure 6 56 Connectivity Advanced Page ID IP Mapping Tab 250 Figure 6 57 Connectivity Advanced Page QoS Marking Rules Tab 251 Figure 6 58 Connectivity Advanced Page Keep Alive Tab 254 Figure 6 59 Services Page Definitions Tab cccceccseeeessceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenseaeeeeeenneaees 255 Figure 6 60 Services Page Mapping Tab 258 Figure 6 61 New Site Sector Window ec sccccccccees costae nessseeantecestasnntes Wectvesasntemsvdecsiaenussteatetdenntons 263 Figure 6 62 Site Sector Page tect sselehvese sd uate celeste ee echeere eee Ad center laaeicettead 264 Figure 7 1 Performance Page ccsxateere seca catdaraitcctiatentdenea nd verredcens ue iace me acensnte seemiameneeraieee 269 Figure 7 2 The Performance Viewer 270 Figure 8 1 Performance Collection Task Editor General Tab 278 Figure 8 2 Performance Collection Task Editor Entities Tab 279 Figure 8 3 Performance Collection Task Editor Actions Tab 280 Figure 8 4 Backup Task e EE 283 Figure 8 5 Restore Task Editor E 286 Figure 8 6 Software Upgrade Task Editor NPU Software Upgrade sssssesssseeessseesssrressee
34. in case of many such failures You may at any time use the Back button to go back to previous screens In the last screen click Finish to end the Duplicate Site configuration file creation You can view the available Duplicate Site configuration files in the File Manager see Duplicate Site File Manager on page 310 From the File Manager you can also initiate the operation of loading a Duplicate Site configuration file to its target site Starting the Twin Site Creation Wizard To start the Twin Site Creation Wizard 1 Select Configuration Management gt Duplicate Site from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The Duplicate Site Manager window opens 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard System Managed Network Fault Management Configuration Management Service Provisioning Administration Security Management Help t p 1 iB Equipment Manager x ggf Network Maintenance x Template Manager x Al Duplicate Ste x Duplicate Site Management Required Functionality Twin Site Creation lv duplicate Site Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 5 1 Duplicate Site Manager 2 Inthe Required Functionality field select Twin Site Creation in the current release this is the only option Click Next to open the first screen of the twin site creation wizard 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device
35. milliseconds The range is 0 5000 Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and the data delivery type is UGS or ERT VR Grant Interval An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the grant interval in milliseconds The range is 0 5000 Relevant only if modify serviceqos is TRUE and the data delivery type is UGS or ERT VR 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 262 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Sector not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 11 6 11 1 Site Sector not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Site Sector node includes a page for each configured site sector Up to 6 site sectors numbered 1 to 6 can be defined To add a site sector right click the Site Sector node in the navigation tree and select Create Site Sector Mandatory Parameters Site Sector Number SiteSector 2 ly Figure 6 61 New Site Sector Window In the New Site Sector window select the mandatory Site Sector Number the available options include only unassigned numbers and click OK You should configure additional properties in the Site Sector page that is added to the navigation tree To delete a site sector right click the required Site Sector sub node in the navigation tree and select Delete Site Sector Page The Site Sector page enables defining site sector general properties and associations 4Motio
36. on page 99 and are available in the database of the management system It also enables initiating the Restore Configuration Task see Restore Configuration Task on page 285 exporting files to the client file system and importing files stored in the client file system Files are added to the database by either importing them see details below or when created using the Duplicate Site Manager a mm Managed Network Faut Management Confipr sion Hanspemert Service Provisioning Administration Seurty Management Helo b L rie manager x View ei lt S Fiter jes ral i n Ske P Ske ID NE Type Soltware Version Fie Mem Date a Results on page 0 Tota 0 s PageSize 100 4 Se Manager Server 10 10 167 117 User admin Figure 9 2 Duplicate Site File Manager You can use the Criteria Select Filters for viewing only files that meet one or several selection criteria The read only details of displayed files are Parameter Description Site IP The IP address of the device as configured during creation of the duplicate site file 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 The File Manager Duplicate Site File Manager Parameter Description BTS Number The ID number of the device Site ID as configured during creation of the duplicate site file NE Type The type of product used for preparing the duplicate site file S
37. source BS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Bearer IP The IP address of the BS s IP interface null Center Frequency From f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth copied from the source BS null Cell ID 0 31 null Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 null Segment Number 0 2 null Frame Number Offset 0 15 null Map Major Groups 6 bits representing the selection of Map Major Groups 0 to 5 where the left most bit bit 5 represents Major Group 5 If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant If Segment Number is 0 then bit 0 should be set 1 If Segment Number is 1 then bit 2 should be set 1 If Segment Number is 2 then bit 4 should be set 1 null Default Authenticator IP IP addres null BS Radio Node Radio Basic Page General Tab Name String up to 32 characters null Bandwidth E 5 MHz E 7 MH
38. 255 0 Type L2 or L3 L3 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Layer 2 applicable only for L2 rules CVID 1 4094 null Layer 3 applicable only for L3 rules Enable IP TOS Enable Disable check box Disable TOS Range From 0 63 0 TOS Range To 0 63 0 TOS Mask 0 63 0 Enable IP Protocol Enable Disable check box Disable IP Protocol 1 255 1 Enable IP Source Classifer Enable Disable check box Disable IP Source Address Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 IP Source Mask Valid IP address mask 255 255 255 255 Enable IP Destination Classifier Enable Disable check box Disable IP Destination Address Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 IP Destination Mask Valid IP address mask 255 255 255 255 Layer 4 applicable only for L3 rules Enable TCP UDP Source Port Enable Disable check box Disable TCP UDP Source Port From 1 65535 1 TCP UDP Source Port To 1 65535 65534 Enable TCP UDP Destination Port Enable Disable check box Disable TCP UDP Destination Port From 1 65535 1 TCP UDP Destination Port To 1 65535 65534 Create New Service Profile Service Profile Name String 1 30 characters null Service Profile Page Profile Status E Enable Disable E Disable Service Flow Parameters Flow ID 1 255 1 Media Flow Type String up to 32 charac
39. 290 Figure 8 7 Software Upgrade Task Editor AU Software Upgrade 292 Figure 8 8 File Data Aging Task Editor sicisssncccccccsessassecarieneniancavedvanttemnenucesonnctieeacteni ideuneieinanates 294 Figure 8 9 CLI Task E 296 Figure 8 10 Mass Neighboring Task Eqitor cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeneeseeneneeeeeees 299 Figure 8 11 Multiple Configuration Task Editor sciicsccescseiscceicteonencesvnencteneadieseaceteowrateaneeecnidvearees 302 Figure 9 1 Equipment File MAN AGEL scxctccccssuessecactcnnebeacas vabiuthenesesteasdtecasteneeetead Suen hheieretuevauanennie 307 Figure 9 2 Duplicate Site File Manager see ccc eteciccennssedeepeetsaeimateetsicenntesbncadd egenen 310 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 i E Enabling Discovery Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery To allow remote management of the site and to enable discovery by the management system some basic parameters must be configured locally using CLI via the MON port of the equipment Refer to the equipment System Manual for information on how to access the CLI either via the MON port or via Telnet and how to use it The following configuration steps describe the minimum mandatory configuration actions required 1 Clear Previous Configuration Clear existing site configuration must be executed for used NPUs Restore to factory default and reboot using the following command npu
40. 3 applicable only for L3 rules Enable IP TOS Indicates whether the use of TOS based classification is enabled TOS Range Relevant only if Enable IP TOS is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP TOS is disabled The range of values From To of the IP TOS field from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 0 to 63 TOS Mask Relevant only if Enable IP TOS is enabled The mask for IP TOS value This bit mask is applied to the TOS field received in the IP header to be matched within the configured TOS range The range is from0 to 63 Enable IP Protocol Indicates whether the packet is classified based on the value of the IP protocol IP Protocol Relevant only if Enable IP Protocol is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Protocol is enabled The enabled protocol number Value is in the range 1 255 using standard IANA protocol values Enable IP Source Classifer Indicates whether the use of an associated IP source address is enabled for the classification rule IP Source Address Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The IP source address enabled for the classification rule 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 209 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description IP Source Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled Configurable
41. 3 4 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 14 64 QAM 2 3 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 25 Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 7 64 QAM 3 4 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 25 Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 7 64 QAM 5 6 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 25 Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 7 Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab Trigger Setup Averaging Duration 1 255 frames 50 TBS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 334 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Handover Default Action Time 0 255 frames 9 Fast Ranging Allocations 0 255 frames 2 Neighbor Advertisement Broadcast Interval 0 100 in steps of 0 1 10 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab Alarm Thresholds for Downlink Dropped Packets Ratio Best Effort 1 1000 promil 1000 RT VR 1 1000 promil 1000 NRT VR 1 1000 promil 1000 UGS 1 1000 promil 1000 ERT VR 1 1000 promil 1000 Alarm Thresholds for noise and interference level Uplink Median Noise 135 to 100 dBm 122 Uplink 99 Percentile Noise 135 to 100 dBm 125 Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab Scheduler Mode E Equal Rate Equal Rate E Equal Time Scheduler DL Abuse Protection E None None L
42. 6 17 Power Supply Page The Power Supply page includes the following sections E PIU Card Properties mM PSU Card Properties 6 8 1 1 1 PIU Card Properties The PIU Card Properties table includes the following parameters for each PIU card slot Parameter Description Slot Number Read only The number of the slot allocated to the PIU card 1 2 Required Indicates whether the PIU card is required in the specific slot Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displaying the available options Yes No Installed Read only The status of the PIU card installation Installed or Not installed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Operational Read only The operational status of the PIU card Active or Inactive Required HW Version The required current supply capability of the card Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displaying the available options 58Amp 35Amp Installed HW Version Read only The current supply capability of the installed card empty for a PIU that is not installed 6 8 1 1 2 PSU Card Properties The PSU Card Properties table includes the following parameters for each PSU card slot Parameter Description Slot Number Read only The number of slot allocated to the PSU card 1 4 Required Indicates whether the PSU
43. ACLs ACLs are applied on traffic received from the DATA MGMT or CSCD ports and destined towards the NPU and not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW the AUs By default all traffic destined towards the AUs or ASN GW is denied You can configure ACLs for allowing or dropping traffic destined towards the ASN GW and or All AUs that meets certain criteria You can create the following types of ACLs E Standard ACL 1 99 Allows you to filter traffic based on the source and destination IP addresses E Extended ACL 100 198 Allows you to filter traffic based on the source and destination IP addresses source and destination ports and protocol E Extended ACL 199 is used only for QoS Marking rules for classifying traffic originating from the NPU and applying DSCP and or Priority values for proper QoS handling of traffic that meets certain criteria It is recommended not to delete this ACL 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity By default ACL 199 includes 8 pre configured rules referencing pre configured classifiers that point to pre configured actions IP Interface Type of Protocol Source Classifier Action DSCP Priority Source IP Traffic Port ID ID Address Bearer RADIUS UDP 1812 1 1 7 7 Bearer MobilelP UDP 434 2 2 7 7 Agent Bearer WiMAX ASN UDP 2231 3 3 7 7 Control Plane Protocol Internal OBSAI U
44. ASN GW Parameter Description Scheduler UL Abuse Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate Protection Level None No Protection Low Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with very low UL transmission Rate Medium Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low UL transmission Rate 6 10 3 Connectivity Node The Connectivity Node includes the following pages E Connectivity Basic Page E Connectivity Advanced Page 6 10 3 1 Connectivity Basic Page The Connectivity node s Basic page includes the following tabs E Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Tab E Connectivity Basic Page Authentication Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device 6 10 3 1 1 Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Tab The Bearer tab enables defining the Bearer Interface of the BS parameters 4 Basic 0 0 2 0 12 148 Borer Authenbcstion Baser Inkert ace IP Address 11122 ist Mak Defaf Gateway 1 0 10 MIU See L S uvees Vien iD Il 1 Betrest a nb Dens Figure 6 54 Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Tab The Bearer tab includes the following parameters BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the bearer interface of the BS Must be unique in the nework All BS bearer interfaces of the u
45. All MSs Data on page 18 Single MS De Registration on page 21 All MSs De Registration on page 22 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager Sik The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager supports MS Level operations related to the display of the momentary values of a predefined set of parameters of a specific Mobile Subscriber MS These parameter values can to be evaluated during operator initiated troubleshooting In addition this feature enables forced de registration of one or multiple MSs from the network In the current release MS level operations supported by the management system are targeted towards the ASN GW gt To open the Network Maintenance Manager 1 Select Managed Network gt Network Maintenance from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The Network Maintenance Manager window opens 2 Inthe Operation drop down menu select the required operation The available options are Retrieval of MS Data on page 16 Retrieval of All MSs Data on page 18 Single MS De Registration on page 21 All MSs De Registration on page 22 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW el Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of MS Data i Retrieval of MS Data The Retrieval of MS Data option is used to retrieve data related
46. CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Legal Rights CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS Limitation of Liability a ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCH
47. Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Sector not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW E An AU Port combination of AU Slot No and AU Port No cannot appear in more than one entry E An Antenna Port combination of Antenna No and Antenna Port No cannot appear in more than one entry E A specific Antenna can only be associated with a single Sector In the current release a specific BS can only be associated with a single AU and vice versa If BS 66053 is associated with AU 1 BS 66053 cannot be associated with another AU and AU 1 cannot be associated with another BS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter F _ The Performance Viewer Chapter 7 The Performance Viewer In This Chapter E The Performance Viewer on page 267 E The Counters Group Selection Section on page 270 E The Counters Selection Section on page 271 E The Graph and Controls Section on page 273 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Viewer The Performance Viewer 7 1 The Performance Viewer A521 on 10 0 22 248 Performance Monitoring L e x Site 248 fau Port 2 S Connectivity GL AU Port DO au Port 1 D AUPort 2 r Value Scale Pan D aire EHM A521 PM Monitoring O AUPort4 OI AU Port 100 C Positive Onl
48. Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor The Base Band parameter is Parameter Description Bandwidth The BS channel bandwidth 5 MHz 7 MHz 10MHz 4 4 3 1 4 Idle Mode Tab BCEE General Det RF Base Bad tile Mode 1 Ap Pare Structure Triggers O Ide Mode ms Intisted For Ugs Figure 4 24 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Idle Mode Tab The Idle Mode tab is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The Idle Mode parameters are Parameter Description Idle Mode Ms Initiated For UGS Defines whether BS allows MS to enter idle mode initiated by the MS when there is a UGS connection available If it is disabled BS shall always reject MS initiation and request to enter idle mode If it is enabled BS would approve MS to enter the idle mode without being able to guarantee the required QoS for UGS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 1 5 Air Frame Structure Tab L Rade advanced 1 Connectivity Basie C Connectivity Advanced O seevices LAE ese Beet ida Moda He Frane Secher Ges g cao C Preamble Group v Segnent Mate Di O Frame number offset LI Total Uplink Duration slots D C Map Major Groups C Base Map Repernion D LJ Comnlink Data
49. Device Driver User Manual Contents Contents Chapter EE DISCOVETY EG 1 Chapter e The Eguipment Manager ic ietsiitonidectiaierdacanensapmaniaemnrindnins 5 2 1 The Equipment EE E 7 2 2 The Equipment Editor svcassicccsnnssercianeasinsscreninnesnianasneetncsnvasansnancistactirnnnasaseisanencninden 11 Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager 13 3 1 The Network Maintenance Manager sssssssennennnnnnnennnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnen 15 3 2 Retrieval of MS Dataiirassscsiscscse sctccscnsteceansaceseeeteseeunaasecetasansec onssaacces casacsincsaaceetentabanancee 16 3 3 Retrieval of All MSs Data nnsnnnnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 18 3 4 Single MS De Registration ccssseeccesseeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeesseeneeeeesseeeseeesseaees 21 3 5 All MSs De Reeletrateon segeueeguesgkessuueuegC Eege 22 Cheaper d The Template Manager a9 Ed RER EAR Eed EUREN Eed teen 23 4 1 The Template Manager sssssunnunnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 25 GR TTT 28 4 3 THE Template BQ osisicestecstccceeetessescencedsncestencaaminase letaaseietsiwtnddeeedsiiadeancaseiieanineadiaen 29 4 4 The Template Configuration Editor eccccssssceeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeseseeseesseeeeenseeeeeees 30 AAA Managing WE e EE 30 4 4 2 ASN GW E le 32 4 4 3 BS Template eegene 61 4 4 4 Management Template c ccceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenenee
50. Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard 5 2 3 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 H H SP Equipment manager x d Location Manager x d Discovery Settings x D taskmanager x aff Duplicate Ste x Twin Site Creation Source File File Type Backup v Required SW Version 2 5M EI Configuration File Name Browse BTS Number New Site duplicate Site Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 5 2 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 The first screen of the wizard includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source File File Type Select the type of the file to be used as a basis for the new Duplicate Site configuration file Backup file or another Duplicate Site file Required SW Version Select the required SW version of the source equipment In the current release only Sw version 2 5M is applicable Configuration File Name Click on the Browser button to open either the Backup File Selector or Duplicate Site File Selector according the the selected File Type Only files from devices that used the specified SW Version at the time of file creation will be available for selection BTS Number Read only The BTS Number Site ID of the source equipment for the selected source file New Site BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the new site The Duplicate Site configuration file
51. E 14 E Template Manager Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 4 1 The Template Manager You can use the Filter Criteria Manager for viewing only templates that meet one or several selection criteria The read only details of displayed template are 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Manager Parameter Description Name The name of the template NE Type The type of Network Element for which the template is prepared MO Type The type of Managed Object ASN GW BS Management for which the template is applicable SW Version The SW Version used for preparing the template Owner The user that created the template Template Mode The mode of configuration changes that will take place when a Multiple Configuration task uses the template to modify configuration of devices For details refer to Template Modes on page 28 Select one or several entries and right click to view the following management options Button Description New Adds a new template object to the database Click to open the Template Editor opens allowing to enter general information on the template to be added For more details see The Template Editor on page 29 NOTE The New option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry Edit Not available if tw
52. HA Eere Type l Regon BTS Number BTS Narre Set Bate Software Version Seid Number S DI am macro 81s 233 10 10 144 35 reu_ 52121 903 90006808 EE eC D o 4M Macro 81S eut Ne 2 0 fistrbuted 10 10 14 41 EE 7471450 DI unser sts 4747 10 10 144 194 z rou 252121 7273350 EI Resuls on page 4 Total 4 emt i iquipmerk Manager Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 2 1 The Equipment Manager The equipment table include all the objects that exist in the database of the management system This includes devices that were discovered by the management system using either Network Discovery Task or Range Discovery Task not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility and devices that were added manually to the database see New option below The background color of the device s icon is in accordance with the device s alarm status the highest severity open alarms 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 2 The Equipment Manager The Equipment Manager You can use the Criteria Select Filters for viewing only devices that meet one or several selection criteria LOCAL CRAFT NOTE The Equipment Manager in the Local CRAFT Utility enables managing a single device of a certain type Any additional device added will not be manageable To manage a new device when a device of the same type already exists in the Equipment Manager you must delete the existing entity before adding the new one
53. ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map Major Groups see below used for the FDC transmission Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The range is from 0 to 15 Map Major Groups 6 bits representing the selection of Map Major Groups 0 to 5 where the left most bit MSB represents Major Group 5 lf BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant If Segment Number is 0 then bit 0 should be set 1 If Segment Number is 1 then bit 2 should be set 1 If Segment Number is 2 then bit 4 should be set 1 Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW x 6 10 2 6 10 2 1 NOTE The available values for Center Frequen
54. IP address from HA using the mobile IP Configurable only when creating a new Service Group Note that upon selection of the Relay option the other parameters available in the Editors change to reflect the unique functionality of this mode Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups Not applicable in DHCP Relay mode The lease time in seconds of IP address allocated for MS from this Service Group The range is 24 4294967295 In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept DHCP Own IP Address Applicable only for IP Service Groups The IP address of the DHCP server relay proxy For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 Configurable only when creating a new Service Group Enable Service VLAN Applicable only for IP Service Groups with an attached VLAN service interface Indicates the status of a VLAN service interface attached to the service group Not configurable when the attached Service Interface is IP in IP If a Service Group with Service VLAN enabled is attached to a Service Profile Service VLAN cannot be disabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description
55. Indicates whether the use of an associated IP source address is enabled for the classification rule 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 4 6 Classification Rule Destination Address Tab B 1 25 L Aow C Service Group L Qos Marking FA L Service Profie f EHS Rutes 1 Classiication Contig Classiication Rade Protocol Cassiication Rule Source Address Cissi raion Rude Destination Address Classico lt Add Kro lt p Revert Rule Number JE Rule Number ee N O IP Destination Mask ke Water O P Destination Address i Enable P Destination Classifier D gh giel v zs Figure 4 13 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Address Tab The Classification Rule Destination Address tab is applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The Classification Rule Destination Address table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Destination Address parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules IP Destination Number The index of the IP Source IP Destination Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule
56. Level for ACK 7 see ACK parameter above CDMA The C N in dB required for transmitting CDMA reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CQI 8 to Required C N Level for CQI 7 see CQI parameter above QPSK 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CDMA 16 to Required C N Level for CDMA 14 see CDMA parameter above QPSK 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 14 see QPSK 1 2 parameter above 16 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for transmitting 16 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 7 see QPSK 3 4 parameter above 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parmeter Description 16 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 16 QAM 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20
57. Management and Internal Management interfaces the IP address of the Internal Management interface is set to 10 0 0 254 This interface is not applicable for the Mini Centralized ASN GW The availability of certain interfaces depend on the connectivity mode These entries cannot be modified or deleted In addition the default Any Destination entry with Destination 0 0 0 0 and Mask 0 0 0 0 may be created The Next Hop IP address of this route must be in the same subnet with one of the NPU IP interfaces according to specific network topology and needs QoS Marking Rules Page The QoS Marking Rules page enables defining the rules that classify the traffic originating from the NPU into different flows and 802 1p VLAN Priority and or DSCP values to be applied on traffic that match the criteria defined by the applicable classification rules 3 QoS Marking Rules Marking Actions Action ID I Flag i DSCP Priority 1 DSCP amp Priority 7 7 2 DSCP amp Priority 7 7 d DSCP amp Priority 7 7 d DSCP amp Priority o o 5 DSCP amp Priority o a e DSCP amp Priority o a H DSCP amp Priority o o d DSCP amp Priority o a Add Action Delete Q05 Marking Classifiers Classifier ID I Action ID 1 1 2 2 gd 3 4 4 5 5 e 6 7 H d 8 add Classifier Delete SS rage 9 g S Figure 6 12 QoS Marking Rules Page The QoS Marking Rules page includes the following sections
58. Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The Classification Config Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Rule 1 100 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Priority The priority level assigned to the classification rule The range is 0 255 TOS Range From and TOS Relevant only if Enable IP TOS is enabled The range of values From To of the Range To IP TOS field from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 0 to 63 TOS Mask Relevant only if Enable IP TOS is enabled The mask for IP TOS value This bit mask is applied to the TOS field received in the IP header to be matched within the configured TOS range The range is from0 to 63 Enable IP TOS Indicates whether the use of TOS based classification is enabled PHS Rule Name Applicable only for L3 Rules The Packet Header Suppression PHS rule name associated with th
59. Number The index of the Customer VLAN ID Customer VLAN ID Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID The Customer VLAN ID value to be assigned to the classification rule The range is 1 4094 4 4 2 5 Service Profile Page The Service Profile page comprises the following tabs M Service Profile Config Tab E Service Flow Tab E UL DL Reference Classification Rule Tabs 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 5 1 Service Profile Config Tab Le aow C Service Group 1 Qos Marking Seefe gt Service Profile CoM L aa Service Profle Corli Senrice Fio UL Rel erence Classification Rule DL Eeleren Classification Rute Ad x CP Revert Serven Profle Number 19 Service Profile Number Name 4 J Nome O Profie Status K ga Refresh vi swe AAR Figure 4 17 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Profile Config Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The Service Profile Config table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Service Profile Number The index number of the Service Profile 1 64 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the Service Profile A string of 1 to 30 characters Must
60. Otherwise the new entity will be added with Unlicensed state To apply a License to the new entity you must first delete the older one After performing the necessary changes click Retrieve to update the display The information displayed for each device refreshed every 15 seconds includes Parameter Description Type The device s type Region The location associated with the device in the management system database BTS Number The device number Site ID configured in the device The BTS Number is used by the management system as the device identifier BTS Name The device name configured in the device Site IP The IP address of the device this is the IP address of the interface used for managing the device Applicable only for devices that are Up or that were reached previously State The management state of the device E Up if the management system can communicate with and manage the device E Unreachable for a device that the management system is aware of exists in the database but cannot be reached currently HM Unknown is typically a temporary status for a device that is available in the database but has never been reached in the past and its current status is unknown After a short time its status should change to one of the other options E Unlicensed If the number of devices of a certain type in the database has reached the number of licenses for managing the specific
61. Page Classification Rule Source Address Tab 48 Figure 4 13 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Address Tab 50 Figure 4 14 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Port Tab 51 Figure 4 15 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Port Tab 53 Figure 4 16 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Figures 54 Figure 4 17 Rows to Tables Template Figure 4 18 bles Template Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Figure 4 29 Figure 4 30 Figure 4 31 Figure 4 32 Figure 4 33 Figure 4 34 Figure 4 35 Figure 4 36 Figure 4 37 Figure 4 38 Rows to Tables Template Figure 4 39 Figure 4 40 Figure 4 41 89 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Profile Config Tab Add The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Flow Tab Add Rows to Ta The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page UL Reference Classification Rule seu bGuad baie ehelbaadeasneewas tuted E E T 59 The ASN GW Template Keep Alive Page EE 60 The BS Template Radio Basic Page General Def Tab 62 The BS Template Radio Basic Page RF Tab EE 64 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Base Ban
62. Page Feedback Tab Updated value range for Start of Ranging Codes Removed consistency rule Updated value range for IR CDMA Allocation Period Removed Contention Based Reservation Timeout Number of Codes Initial Backoff Window Size Final Backoff Window Size PR CDMA Allocation Period Enable polling upon zero bandwidth request all Timing Corrections parameters Maximum CO Region Size August 2009 Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab New Moved from Radio Basic Page with following changes Downlink Data MIMO Mode is read only Removed all other parameters excluding Downlink Permutation Base and Uplink Permutation Base August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW vi Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Radio Advanced Page Channel Removed August 2009 Descriptors Tab Radio Advanced Page Power Tab name changed was Power Control August 2009 Control Tab Levels Added Power Control Correction Factor Removed Feedback Zone and Maximum EIRxP Updated range for PUSC Zone Radio Advanved Page Power Removed August 2009 Control Policy Tab Radio Advanced Page Rate Removed Basic Rate parameters moved to August 2009 Adaptation Tab Services Page Definitions Tab Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab New Name was Handover August 2009 Removed all SBS and Handover Control parameters Changed the name of RSSI paramet
63. Protocol IP Protocol Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule The Classification Rule Protocol Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Protocol parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules IP Protocol Number The index of the IP Protocol IP Protocol Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule IP Protocol Relevant only if Enable IP Protocol is enabled The enabled protocol number Value is in the range 1 255 using standard IANA protocol values Enable IP Protocol Indicates whether the packet is classified based on the value of the IP protocol 4 4 2 4 5 Classification Rule Source Address Tab Brem 4 L Auen C Servie Group L Qos Marking ROA a C Service Profile EHS Rutes 1 est Contig Gestalte Rude Protocol Classification Rule Source Address Gesi gien Rude Destination Address Clastic lt gt pad X lt p Revert 13 Re Mate IP Source Narber A Ei Um Source mack O P Source Address Gy Enable IP Source Classifier DI L ebe l vz Kl Figure 4 12 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Address Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User M
64. Site ID using either the management system or CLI If you are using CLI run the command npu config site identifier lt site id lt 0 999999 gt gt and save the new configuration using the command npu write Restart the site NPU to apply the change This will clean the active alarms and the Performance Monitoring files with the old BTS Number ID from the database of the NPU Delete old site from the database of the management system In the Equipment Manager select the BTS and click Delete The management system will automatically close all open alarms remove the old BTS Number ID from all the tasks such as Performance Collection Backup Configuration and Keep Alive It will also stop processing new alarms form this old site The user should perform manual discovery of the new device with the old IP address which now doesn t exist in the database of the management system After discovery the management system will initiate full synchronization as for any new device The management system will add this new device to all network wide tasks such as keep alive Regarding user initiated tasks such as Performance Collection and Backup Configuration the user should manually modify and add this device to the existing tasks Location not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Location section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Longitude The longitude of the site Confi
65. Tab RPO Loosen Lop Seventy Derer dl RH Enable logging to server disable EI Dear eniei SS Ses soe Kc Figure 4 45 The Management Template Logging Page NPU Logging Tab The NPU Logging tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Server IP The server IP address of the server on which logs are to be maintained If logging to server is enabled the Server IP cannot be changed To change the Server IP you need thre steps 1 Disable logging to server in the managed objects 2 Update the Server IP in the managed objects 3 Enable logging to server in the managed objects Enable logging to server Indicates whether or not logging to the server is enabled Enable logging to file Indicates whether or not logging to file is enabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW e Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 4 3 2 Log Severity Tab GE Le Management 3 SNMP Managers 0 Performance EE SE o E Peformance Alert EI SW zeit Critical Di Bas Informational x Brox Error SW Version Emergency Ki E connectivity Warring EI Bama Emergency eer D Refresh Save tk __ Figure 4 46 The Management Template Logging Page Log severity Tab The Log Severity tab enables setting the minimum severity level that generates a log entry for each of
66. Tasks Restore Configuration Task 8 3 Restore Configuration Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Restore Configuration Task is applicable only to the managed device The Restore Configuration task enables loading a configuration file to a target device The configuration file can be one of the following E A backup configuration file previously retrieved from the target device H A Duplicate Site configuration file previously prepared for the target device based on the defined Site ID The task also enables loading a vendor configuration file to selected devices A vendor configuration file includes vendor parameters that cannot be configured by the configuration tools available to the customer If for any reason the vendor will decide that any of these parameters should be modified the applicable customers will be notified and a special file that includes the necessary modifications shall be sent to them gt To open the Restore Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard E To open an existing task select an existing Restore Configuration task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Restore Task Editor for the selected task is displayed OR In the File Manage
67. The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 14 see 16 QAM 3 4 parameter above 64 QAM 2 3 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 7 see 64 QAM 1 2 parameter above 64 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 7 see 64 QAM 2 3 parameter above 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 75 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description 64 QAM 5 6 The C N in dB required for transmitting 64 QAM 5 6 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 7 see 64 QAM 3 4 parameter above Power Control Correction Correction in dB of max allowed UL SINR given DL SINR measurement Factor The higher the correction factor is the higher is the allowed UL Tx Power The range is from 20 to 30 in steps of 0 1 dBm 4 4 3 2 5 Manageme
68. Zone Permutation Base G Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base C Uplink Data Zone Permutation bas O Ommam Permutations Downlink Permi aan Base O Oymamec Ferm tsborg Uplink Permutation Base L Minimum Sin symbols Maximam Size symbob lt RIRI RI O Mamm Msp size slots lt Refresh v Swe Figure 4 25 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Tab The Air Frame Structure tab is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The Air Frame Structure parameters are Parameter Description Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map Major Groups see below used for the FDC transmission Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The range is from 0 to 15 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager
69. a ao a a ia a a ES 280 8 2 Backup Configuration Toeksegte ertosdteeeseegede gege dees 282 8 3 Restore Configuration Task cccssseeccssseceesesseneeeeenseeeeeeseseeeeeseseeneesesseeeeeenseenes 285 8 4 Software Upgrade Tage ees Zeta eege eee 288 8 4 1 The Upgrade Task Editor getest eege ee Ee 288 8 4 2 NPU Software Upgrade 290 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Contents 8 4 3 AU Software Upgrade not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 292 8 5 File Data Aging Task iisisitscisiseessstessnnsciseraiincazsnarseaaneusescateiantincad eneatianiaaniaanemdainieats 294 Ree ke 295 8 7 Mass Neighboring TASK ssisiiinndsccccssnexencinenenieianaranatinaandienetanssiinesesunnicaaenennnnnnnies 298 8 8 Multiple Configuration Template Based Task ccsssseeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneees 301 Chapter ER EE EE 304 9 1 The File EN e TEE 306 9 2 Equipment File Manager esis sccnicinsesecesinssasatsnsscenscanssneae ciseces sienenciassinesexteasaesinenwensaeais 307 9 3 Duplicate Site File Mamaget cccsseeccsseeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseneeeesseeeeeesseeeneeeeseeeeeeneeseees 310 Chapter 10 Parameters ZEIEN 8 ek at tags eier bg echt Stores geg t kges 2312 10 1 Parameters Summary ss nnsssnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 313 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Figures Figures Figure 2 1 The Equipment d
70. and select a contact Click the Eraser icon to clear the Contact field SNMP Parameters applicable only for a single device editor IP Address The device s IP Address Not configurable when editing the properies of an existing object Read community The Read community string password for SNMP get operations This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow disallow SNMP read access The default Read community string is public Write community The Write community string password for SNMP set operations This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow disallow SNMP write access The Write community can also be used for read get operations The default Write community string is private Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP TFTP communication with the Device The range is from 0 to 255 The default is 2 retries Timeout s The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response from the Device before attempting a retransmission or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached The available range is 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 15 seconds 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter Ki The Network Maintenance Manager Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager In This Chapter The Network Maintenance Manager on page 15 Retrieval of MS Data on page 16 Retrieval of
71. ations Neighbor Adverticement Povrer Contrat Managennerk Handover Neydtistionst TBS Trigger Setup Qus O Handover Default action Time Frames L 7 Fast Ranging Aliccations bk Figure 4 32 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Handover Negotiation at TBS Tab The Handover Negotiation at TBS parameters are Parameter Description Handover Default Action Time The number of frames until allocation of non contention based opportunity at a target BS The range is from 0 to 255 frames Fast Ranging Allocations The number of frames until allocation of non contention based opportunity at a target BS The range is from 0 to 255 frames 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW el Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 2 7 Trigger Setup Tab C Connectivity Advanced L Services Ranging Feedback Allocations Neighbor Advertisement Power Contrat Managemer Handover Negctistionst TBS Troyer Setup QoS C Averaging Duration frames lt Figure 4 33 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Trigger Setup Tab The Trigger Setup parameter is Parameter Description Averaging Duration The default RSSI average duration for triggers in frames The range is from 1 to 255 frames 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 7 Device Driver User Manual Chap
72. card is required in the specified slot Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displaying the available options Yes No Installed Read only The status of the PSU card installation Installed or Not installed Operational Read only The operational status of the PSU card Operational or Down 6 8 1 2 NPU Page The NPU Page displays the properties of the NPU card and enables control of the card and configuration of the time for automatic scheduling of the configuration backup 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment NPU Cord Properties Slot Number Instaled Yes Serial Number 7619738 HW Version Number HW Revision Number 3 Operational SW Version Number Shadow SW Version Number Currerk Running SW Source Control 3 shutdown Operation No Action lv Pakomatic Configuration Badup Daly Backup Tine Co C aa 17 Seel e m Ess Figure 6 18 NPU Page The NPU page includes the following E Card Properties E Control E Automatic Configuration Backup 6 8 1 2 1 Card Properties The Card Properties section includes the following read only parameters of the NPU card Parameter Description Slot Number The number of the slot allocated to the NPU card In current release the NPU can be installed only in slot 5 Installed The status of the NPU card instal
73. created When working under UNIX refer to the instructions in opt lt NMS name gt firmware wm 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 288 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task The system will automatically identify the files and use the correct file for each device type x NOTE The file name and format should not be changed To open the Software Upgrade Task Editor y In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard E To open an existing task select a Software Upgrade task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task entry If the task is Active the Runtime Results window is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Software Upgrade Task Editor for the task is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Task Name Software Download Activity NPU Software Upgrade EI Software Upgrade Settings LI Download To Shadow R I Reboot From Shadow Set As Operational version File Name TFTP IP Address 10 10 187 117 Select Equipment 4747 mm BE 10 10 1 npu Eech Mpi JEE DAA p kend DER LS zeg Figure 8 6 Software Upgrade Task Editor NPU Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade Task Editor includes the following general parameters Task Name The na
74. device type additional devices of this type added to the database will be presented as unlicensed These devices cannot be managed by the system The License button in the Equipment Manager will be available upon selecting unlicensed object s allowing to install additional licenses Software Version The currently running SW version of the NPU Applicable only for devices that are Up or that were reached previously Serial Number The serial number of the NPU Applicable only for devices that are Up or that were reached previously 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 2 The Equipment Manager The Equipment Manager Select one or several entries and right click to view the following management options Button Description New Adds new equipment object to the database Click to open the Equipment Type selection dialog box Select the Type of device you want to add and click OK The Equipment Editor opens allowing to enter general information on the equipment to be added For more details see The Equipment Editor on page 11 NOTE The New option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry Configure Opens the Device Manager for the selected device Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the State of the selected device is other than Up For more details refer to Managin
75. enables the BSs that will participate in a one time task according to the selected operation Neighboring Task Operation Add neighbor Current BS BS ID LSB 0 0 3 BS Name slot9 Neighboring List Remove BTS Number BTSName OperatorID BSIDLSB Status 127 Oded 0 0 2 3 100 14 e Die Figure 6 47 Neighboring Task Operation Add Neighbor 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 234 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Neighboring Task includes the following components Parameter Description Operation The operation to be executed according to the button that initiated the task E Add neighbor E Delete neighbors E Get Update E Send Update to Neighboring E Delete from Neighboring Current BS The BS ID LSB and BS Name of the current BS Neighboring List The details of neighboring BSs that will participate in the task The initial list includes the BSs that where selected when the task was initiated You may use the Remove button to remove selected BS s from the list The details for each neighboring BS in the list includes its ID BS ID LSB Site Name and Site ID Site Number Refer also to Mass Neighboring Task on page 298 6 10 2 2 Radio Advanced Page The Radio Advanced page includes the following tabs E Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab E Radio Advanced P
76. in milliseconds cannot be lower than Retransmission Timeout x Number of Retransmissions 1 Number of Retransmissions Maximum number of retries if Retransmission Timeout has expired without getting a response The range is from 1 to 10 Retransmission Timeout Time in milliseconds to wait for a response before initiating another polling attempt or reaching a decision that the polled entity has failed if the maximum number of retries set by Number of Retransmissions has been reached The range is from 5000 to 10000 milliseconds 5 to 10 second 6 10 BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The BS node enables the configuration of various properties related to radio transmissions connectivity and services of each BS The BS node includes the following subnodes and pages for each existing BS E Radio Node Radio Basic Page Radio Advanced Page E Connectivity Node Connectivity Basic Page d Connectivity Advanced Page E Services Page 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW oz Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW IMPORTANT Many BS parameters are applied only after resting the AU This is indicated by a pop up message If applicable do not forget to reset the AU after completing all modifications refer to AU Control Tab on page 177 Some BS parameters sho
77. lee Wis We start D E Wd Map nd n E Km em e AT SP AD Lawin a Lo s doy Dene m mm Figure 6 33 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab VPWS Mapped Service Type The Service Groups tab includes the Service Groups table and the Editors for Service Group Parameters and DHCP Function 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Select an entry in the table to open the Editors for the Service Group Parameters and the DHCP Function tor for the selected service group The Service Groups table includes the following read only parameters for each of the existing service groups Parameter Description Service Group Number The index number of the Service Group Name The name alias of the Service Group Service Interface Name The name of the service interface associated to the service group The following buttons are available below the Service Groups table Parameter Description Add Adds a new entry to the Service Groups table and opens the Editors for the Service Group Parameters and DHCP Function allowing to configure the required parameters Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Service Groups table A Service Group cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a Service Flow Refer to Service Profile Page on page 212 A Service Group with an associated VLAN Serv
78. may be wrong The counters groups includes E Connectivity Backhaul Port Management Port 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Management Page Cascade Port Internal Ethernet Port collected per AU not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Internal Management Interface not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW External Management Interface Local Management Interface E ASN GW for BTS equipment applicable only in Distributed ASN GW mode H Bearer Interface AAA Client Authenticator Context DataPath DHCP Proxy DHCP Relay DHCP Server SFA MS State Change 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Management Page E BS collected per BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW DeRegistration Integrity Mobility Network Entry Traffic Utilization Idle Mode Fast Feedback CQI Handling Ack Nack Channel Handling End Transaction Update DL Frame Data Zone Histograms Tx R1 Net Traffic Rx R1 Net Traffic Tx R1 Total Traffic Rx R1 Total Traffic DL HARQ Sub Bursts Drop DL HARQ Transmission General All MS Basic Mode collected per MS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Management Page 6 7 3 Logging Tab The Logging tab enables defining various logging parameters
79. new rule Rules can be added only if the Active State of the ACL is Up Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Rules can be deleted only if the Active State of the ACL is Down The ACL Parameters Editor displays the following parameters for the rule selected in the ACL Parameters table Parameter Description Source IP Address The source IP address to allow deny traffic from The address 0 0 0 0 means any address In ACL 199 rules must be the IP address of the Bearer or External Management or Internal Management interface Source IP Mask Not applicable for ACL 199 The mask for the source IP address allowing to define a range of source addresses subnet from which to allow deny traffic Minimum Source Port Applicable only for an extended ACL The minimum source port number of the application traffic from which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 Maximum Source Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable for ACL 199 The maximum source port number of the application traffic from which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 Destination IP Address Not applicable for ACL 199 The destination IP address to which to allow deny traffic The address 0 0 0 0 means any address Destination IP Mask Not applicable for ACL 199 The mask for the destination IP address allowing to define a range of source addresses subnet to which to allow den
80. north Used only for information inventory purposes Tower Height m The height of the antenna above the ground in meters The range is from 0 to 500 Used only for information inventory purposes 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 6 9 ASN GW The ASN GW node is not applicable for devices in Centralised ASN Topology THE ASN GW enables defining various parameters pertaining to the Access Service Network ASN Gateway functionality of the managed device The ASN GW node includes the following pages E AAA Page E Service Group Page E QoS Marking Page E SFA Page E ASN GW Keep Alive Page 6 9 1 AAA Page The AAA page enables the configuration of general RADIUS parameters and the AAA client The RADIUS client encapsulates the messages destined for the AAA 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 188 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW server in RADIUS messages or decapsulates messages sent by the AAA server for the MS Le ste x gt AAA O Ste Connecti 3 Managment AAA Cat Generic Parameters fae ee ASN GW NAS 1D amp ACAL Se 7 Mine Zone Offset D EI o O Service Group WAN Classifier Bt Abynmert MSB Shit C Qos parking AAA Clerk Parameters GFA AAA Name D Keep Aive Source Ip Interlace Radir Shared Secret Currerk Server
81. of a lease that has expired The range is from 1 to 100 The renewal Time must be lower than rebind Time This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Rebind Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The rebind interval as a percentage of the Lease Time This is passed to the MS DHCP client The range is from 1 to 99 This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Primary DNS Server Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode IP Address of the first DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept MS MS Loopback Applicable only for IP Service Groups Indicates whether MS MS loopback is enabled or disabled for the service interface Accounting Mode Accounting mode for the service interface E None No accounting support E Time based The ASN GW send RADIUS Accounting Start Stop Requests The ASN GW shall also send Interim Accounting requests to AAA server using RADIUS Accounting Interim messages on a preconfigured or negotiated interval AAA server can send negotiated time interval in Access Accept message If the defined value see Interim Interval below is zero and there is no Acct Interim Interval in Access Accept interim updates should
82. of the Default Service Profile Uplink Downlink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kops for uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 Not applicable for UGS data delivery type Min Reserved Traffic Rate Kbps The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kops for uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 40000 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Max Latency ms The maximum latency in ms allowed in the uplink downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR Tolera
83. of the Neighbor BS site BTS Number The BTS Name Site ID of the Neighbor BS site The Neighbor List also includes the following buttons 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Button Description Add Entry Opens the BS Selector window that enables selection of one or several new candidate neighbors The selected neighbors appears in the neighbor list however the new neighbors are not actually added until the Add Neighboring Task is executed Action on Selected Neighbors Add Opens the Add Neighboring Task that allows addings the selected BS s to the neighbor list of the current BS Delete Opens the Delete Neighboring Task that allows deleting the selected BS s and their details from the neighbor list of the current BS Get Update Opens the Get Update Neighboring Task that allows getting an update from the selected Neighbor BS sites regarding their current parameters values Network Update To Neighbors Send Updates to All Opens the Send Update to All Neighbors Neighboring Task that allows sending Neighbors updates regarding this BS to all or selected Neighbor BSs Delete from Neighbors Opens the Delete from Neighbors Neighboring Task that allows deleting the current BS and its details from the Neighbor Lists of all or selected Neighbor BSs The Neighboring Task
84. opened by double clicking on the selected configuration file s entry Delete Deletes the selected file s from the database Export Exports the selected file s to the client file system Click to open the Save window browse to the desired location on the client file system and click Save to export the file s Import Imports a configuration backup file from the client file system Click to open the Import Config Backup File window browse to the location on the client file system where the file is stored select the file and click Import NOTE The Import option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry Export To Server Available only for configuration backup and performance files when selecting files of the same type Click to export the selected file s to the file system in the management system s server Performance files are stored in filesystem SitesFiles Performance Backup files are stored in filesystem SitesFiles FullConfiguration A backup file name will be appended with the BTS Number and IP Address 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 The File Manager 2 Duplicate Site File Manager Duplicate Site File Manager The Duplicate Site File Manager enables viewing details of configuration files that were prepared using the Duplicate Site Manager see The Duplicate Site Manager
85. parameters for the new BS all other parameters will be copied from the source BS and may be changed later Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS Replace the BS ID LSB of the source BS with a new value The management system will reject a BS ID LSB already assigned to another BS in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 Operator ID The unique Identifier of the wireless network operator The same Operator ID must be used by all BSs in the managed wireless network Typically the Operator ID copied from the source BS should not be changed The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 Bearer IP The IP address of the bearer interface of the BS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Center Frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are M 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 BW 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3402 5 to 3597 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3602 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 See also note below regarding dependency on configured Bandwidth Cell
86. related to VLAN Service Interface Updated value range for Service Group Name 1 30 characters Added VPWS Mapped option to Service Group Type Updated value range for Lease Time Added rule for DHCP Server IP Address Pool configuration Add rule for Renewal Time configuration Added general description of service groups Updated description of Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address August 2009 SFA Page PHS Rule Tab Updated range for PHS Rule Name August 2009 SFA Page Classification Rule Tab Updated range for Classification Rule Name Added configuration rules for Layer 3 and Layer 4 classifiers August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Service Profile Page Removed Uplink Downlink SDU Size Updated range for Service Profile Name Unsolicited Grant Interval uplink is not applicable for RTVR Traffic Priority not applicable for UGS Updated range for Max Sustained Traffic Rate Min Reserved Traffic Rate Added general description of service profiles and service flows Updated description of Reference Service Interface August 2009 ASN GW Keep Alive Page New Feature August 2009 BS Node Added a note regarding the need to reset the AU and or update neighbors after modifying certain parameters August 2009 Create BS Updated proce
87. required for the slot Refer to Creating Deleting an AU not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 172 for more details 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment 6 3 2 E Click on an installed AU port to view relevant associations if applicable A blue background will be added to the selected AU Port as well as to the ODU and Site Sector associated with it Components View Outdoor BTS Site 100 DU as EH Cia Pa a li kinsten Ar Figure 6 3 Site View Page Outdoor BTS The components view is a graphical display of the BTS showing the installed components and their status Each of the installed modules NPU AUs is marked in a color according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component The following information and actions are available HM Double click on the NPU module to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 169 E In an installed AU the background color of its number indicates its highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Card Properties on page 170 but is not installed the background color is orange If an AU is installed but not defined yet the background color is purple Double click o
88. restore factory default Connectivity Mode The connectivity mode determines how traffic is to be routed between the NPU and the BSs AAA server and external Management System servers The default connectivity mode is In Band IB via the Data port Alternatively the NPU can be managed Out Of Band OOB via the dedicated Management port In Unified mode the bearer IP domain and external management IP domain via the Data port are unified To view the current and configured connectivity mode use the command npu show connectivity mode To change the connectivity mode to Out Of Band use the command npu config connectivity mode outband VLANs Translation In Band Connectivity Mode The Data port operates in VLAN aware bridging mode tagged trunk mode The values configured for VLAN ID s used on this port are the VLAN IDs used internally These are the VLAN ID for the bearer IP interface the default is 11 and in In Band Connectivity mode the VLAN ID of the external management IP interface the default is 12 When using In Band connectivity via the Data port if the value of the VLAN ID used for management in the backbone differs from the value configured for the 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW E Device Driver User Manual Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery external management interface the external management VLAN ID should be translated accordingly It is recommended to configure also VLAN translation for the bea
89. s include either Download to Shadow or Delete AU Version from NPU The name of the upgrade file to be loaded The drop down menu enables selecting one of the files available in the default firmware folder If the selected action is Download to Sgadow and another TFTP server is selected see below the file s should be available in the root of this server Otherwise you should manually specify the full parh and file name TFTP IP Address The IP address of the TFTP server on which the file to be downloaded is stored This address is set by default to the management system s internal TFTP server IP address but can be changed to any external TFTP server IP address You can select both the Download to Shadow and Switch Over options In this case the Switch Over action will take place only after successful completion of the Load to Shadow action The Select Equipment table displays the devices that will participate in the task The displayed functionality depend on the selected action s If the selected action is Delete AU Version from NPU the table displays all the NPUs that will participate in the task and the AU software files stored in each of these NPUs Click on the Add button to open the BTS Selector allowing you to add NPU s to the task If Download to Shadow action is selected the table displays all the AUs that will participate in the task and the current SW versions in each AU Click on the Add button to open the e
90. section includes the following parameter 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Service Name The Service Name HARQ properties assigned to the service flow The available Service Names refer to Definitions Tab on page 255 Note that if a new modified Service Mapping Rule results in the same R1 Profile Data Delivery Scheduling Type see Map to R1 Profile below as an existing rule the Service Names they map to should have the same HARQ properties Maximum DL Retransmissions Maximum UL Retransmissions Max Sub Burst Size and Target Packet Error Rate For details refer to Definitions Tab on page 255 6 10 4 2 2 4 Map to R1 Profile The Map to R1 Profile section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Modify Service QoS Indicates whether to modify service QoS parameters using internal R1 profile Parameters parameters If disabled only the Default Priority parameter is applicable All other parameters below are not applicable If enabled Default Priority is not applicable Availability of other parameters depends on selected option for Data Delivery Scheduling Type Default Priority The traffic priority to be used when priority is missing in the R6 request Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is not enabled The range is 0
91. the NPU side of a point to point tunnel to be used for the applicable traffic E VLAN The Service Interface defines the VLAN ID to be added removed by the NPU to from the applicable traffic Service Group Servie Irkertaces Service Groups Service Irker aces interface Hafe service imeta ype Service Interface Parameters t SLD GE para 2 St Met PoP Service Intef ave Nare E m TE np vre Tunnel Saros IP Tunnel Destinzion IP o o 00 MIU Ste 1 400 T Bytes Servie VAN ID gt Dez ft Gateway IP deldenss Subret Myrk Enable Checkam gurnn a eov Dore Figure 6 28 Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab The Service Interfaces table includes the following read only parameters for each of the configured service interfaces Parameter Description Interface Number The index number of the interface 1 10 Service Interface Name The name of the service interface Type The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN QinQ Select an entry in the table to open the Service Interface Editor for the selected service interface 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The following buttons are available below the Service Interfaces table Parameter Description Add Service Interface Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Service Interface Editor allowing configuration of
92. to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 14 see 16 QAM 1 2 parameter above 64 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 14 see 16 QAM 3 4 parameter above 64 QAM 2 3 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 7 see 64 QAM 1 2 parameter above 64 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 7 see 64 QAM 2 3 parameter above 64 QAM 5 6 The C N in dB required for transmitting 64 QAM 5 6 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 7 see 64 QAM 3 4 parameter above 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device 6 10 2 2 4 6 10 2 2 4 1 BS not applica
93. to a specific MS as maintained by the ASN GW that currently serves the MS 3 Altoer manager x d Genen settings x D rackmanager x remanoger x yf Detcges ste x g vetwork mantenance x Network Maintenance Management rouen Retioval of MS date Target ASN GW IP Address MS Outer NAT ae Ki ie Apne Network Markensnce Server 10 10 107 117 User odan Figure 3 1 Network Maintenance Retrieval of MS Data To retrieve data related to a specific MS enter the ASN GW IP Address of the ASN GW currently serving the MS and the MS Outer NAI a string of up to 253 characters The settings of the MS identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server Click Apply to retrieve the data for the specified MS The displayed details include Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS MS Data MS ID MAC Address the MS ID MAC address 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of MS Data Parameter Description Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the serving device Associated Service Flows per flow assign
94. up to a maximum of 255 generated automatically during rule creation Name The name of the PHS rule 1 30 characters Field Value The PHSF value that is the header string to be suppressed Mask Value bits The PHSM that contains the bit mask of the PHSF with the bits set that is to be suppressed Verify Value Indicates whether or not the PHS header is to be verified Size Value Bytes The size of the header to be suppressed 0 20 The following buttons are available at the bottom of the page Parameter Description Add PHS Rule Adds a new entry to the PHS Rules table allowing to configure parameters of the new rule Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the PHS Rules table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW el Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 6 9 4 2 Classification Rules Tab The Classification Rules tab enables defining the rules that are used to classify packets transmitted on the bearer plane SFA PHS Rules Classification Rules Classification Rules Classification R Name Type Classification Rule Identifiers Name PHS Rule Name E Priority o Z Type LG Add Classification Rule Delete Classification Rule Parameters Layer2 Leet Customer VLAN ID 0 Enable TCP UDP Source Port
95. 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Internal Management Traffic QoS Rules Diffserv Code Point 0 63 0 802 1p Priority 0 7 0 Connectivity Advanced Page Keep Alive Tab Enable Keep Alive E Enable Disable check box Disable Polling Period 10 1000 seconds 60 Number of Retransmissions 1 10 5 Retransmission Timeout 100 10000 milliseconds 1500 Services Page Service Definition Tab Service Name String 1 32 characters null Maximum DL Retransmissions 0 15 5 Maximum UL Retransmissions 0 15 5 Paging Cycle 6 1000 frames 6 Paging Offset 9 1000 frames 0 Traffic Idle Period 50 to 60000 in steps of 50 milliseconds 300 Downlink Basic Link QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 a a D E a E 16 QAM 1 2 E 16 QAM 3 4 E 64 QAM 1 2 E 64 QAM 2 3 E 64 QAM 3 4 P 64 QAM 5 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 Enable Idle Mode Ms Initiated For UGS Enable Disable check box Disable Services Page Mapping Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Service Mapping Rule Parameters Rule Order 1 255 0 must be c
96. 0 9200 88A8 AU Maintenance VLAN ID 1 9 11 100 110 4094 14 Ethernet Ports Editor only Cascade Port is configurable Administrative State E Up Up Following parameters are E Down configurable only if Administrative State is Down Negotiation E Auto Auto Configurable only if Administrative E Manual State is Down 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Port Speed Configurable only if Negotiation is Manual E 10 Mbps E 100 Mbps D 1000 Mbps 1000 Max Frame Size Backhaul interface 1518 9000 bytes Other interfaces 1518 1522 1526 1536 1552 1664 2048 9022 Bytes BD Backhaul 1664 E Other interfaces 1522 Backhaul VLAN Translation a maximu m of two entries Enable VLAN ID Translation Enable Disable check box Disable unchecked VLAN ID A VLAN ID that is allowed on the port N A Change To 11 4094 N A IP Interface Page IP Interface Editor Administrative State E Up Up E Down Description Configurable only if Administrative State is Down String up to 35 characters null empty string IP Address Configurable only if Administrative State is Down Valid IP address External Management 192 168 1 1 Beare 172 16 0 1 Local Management 172 31 0 1 IP Subnet Mask Valid subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Co
97. 255 255 255 255 Add Excluded IP Address Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Valid subnet mask 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway IP Address Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 DNS Server IP Address Valid IP address N A Address Allocation Timeout Renewal Time 1 100 50 Rebind Time 1 99 75 Offer Reuse Time 1 120 5 Management Server Server Host Name String Up to 64 characters Null Client Boot File Name String Up to 128 characters Null Vendor Class Identifier String Up to 30 characters Null string means disable Option 60 dslforum org Vendor Specific Information Name String Up to 64 characters InternetGatewayDevic e ManagementServer URL Vendor Specific Information Value String Up to 64 characters DHCP Function Relay Mode External DHCP Server IP Address Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 Enable Relay Agent Information Enable Disable check box Disable Relay Agent Information Parameters Enable Unicast Relay Agent Enable Disable check box Disable Information Enable RADIUS Attributes Enable Disable check box Disable RADIUS Attribute Messages Service Type Enable Disable check box Disable Vendor Specific Enable Disable check box Disable Session Timeout Enable Disable check box Disable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary
98. 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Tunnel Destination IP Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only for IP in IP service interface Configurable only when adding a new service interface The destination IPv4 address that indicates the point of termination of the tunnel for the service interface Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address Shall not be in the subnet of any Mgmt interface ie Local External and Internal Enable Checksum Applicable only for IP in IP service interfaces Indicates whether or not the tunnel checksum feature is enabled yes or no MTU Size Bytes The MTU in bytes Received packets that are larger than the configured MTU will be dropped The range is 556 1804 Service VLAN ID Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The Service Interface VLAN ID parameter The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 A Service Interface VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID and VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management and External Management interaces Shall also not conflict with CVID of any transpare
99. 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page 6 5 6 5 1 Site Page The Site page enables defining general site properties such as the site location date and time and ASN Topology settings as well as the use of input and output alarms time synchronization and clock source settings The Site page comprises the following three tabs E General Tab E Dry Contact Tab applicable only for Indoor BTS E Time Tab General Tab The General tab enables viewing editing the general site properties For BTS equipment it also enables viewing editing the ASN Topology and the Location parameters Site Genera Dey Contact Time Properties ASN Topology BTS Number Ana met BTS Name El BTS Location Eege eil Prodat Type AX Corfigsred Location in Ste and Rack cistrbuted ASN GW Contact Person a Centralized ASN GW Location Longhude S Ev 7 Labtude 5 S Abitude aoa o gt Soe v m Core Te Figure 6 5 Site Page General Tab BTS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page The General tab includes the following sections E Properties E Location not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW E ASN Topology not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 5 1 1 Properties The Properties section includes the follo
100. 7 Priority An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the traffic priority Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and Data Delivery Scheduling Type is other than UGS The range is 0 7 Data Delivery Scheduling Type An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the type of data delivery service type Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled Available types are UGS RT VR NRT VR BE ERT VR Min Reserved Traffic Rate An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the minimum reserved traffic rate in Kbps The range is 0 40000 Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and Data Delivery Scheduling Type is other than BE 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Max Sustained Traffic Rate An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the maximum sustained traffic rate in Kbps The range is 0 40000 Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and Data Delivery Scheduling Type is other than UGS Latency An internal R1 profile parameter specifying maximum latency in milliseconds The range is 0 5000 Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and the data delivery type is UGS RT VR or ERT VR Jitter An internal R1 profile parameter specifying maximum tolerated jitter in
101. A Client In the current release supporting a single client this is a read only parameter default Source IP Interface Read only Bearer Indicates the interface providing RADIUS client functionality RADIUS Shared Secret The shared secret between the authenticator function and the AAA server A string of 1 to 49 characters Current Server A read only display of the current active server being used In the current release that does not support AAA server redundancy this is always Primary Primary Server IP Address The IPv4 address of the AAA server 6 9 2 6 9 2 1 Service Group Page The Service Group page enables managing the service interfaces and service groups The Service Group page includes the following tabs E Service Interfaces Tab E Service Groups Tab Service Interfaces Tab The Services Interfaces tab enables viewing modifying the parameters of existing service interfaces It also enables adding new service interfaces up to a maximum of 10 and deleting service interfaces 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW A Service Interface defines the parameters of the interface used by the NPU on the network side for services using the applicable Service Interface specified in the applicable Service Group The following types of Service Interface are available E IP in IP The Service Interface defines the parameters on
102. ASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Important Notice Important Notice This User Manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions E This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting explicitly and properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products E No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd E The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice E The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license E Information in this document is subject to change without notice E Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted E Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the product specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless spec
103. Address add deighbor 85 1081P Deist elo gt Soe e Se Dore Figure 6 56 Connectivity Advanced Page ID IP Mapping Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The ID IP Mapping table includes the following parameters for each ID IP mapping entry Parameter Description Network Node ID The ID of the Next Hop Network Node BS BS ID LSB in the format x x x x 0 255 Network Node IP Address The IP address of the Next Hop Network Node BS The ID IP Mapping table also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Neighbor BS ID amp IP Adds an entry to the ID IP Mapping table Delete Removes the selected entry from the table 6 10 3 2 2 Connectivity Advanced Page QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab enables defining Bearer Plan QoS rules CJ E dy Dist IP on 10 4 Advanced 0 0 2 0 12 148 1D 1P Maceing Q05 Marking Res Keep Alwe Bearer Traffic QoS Rues Rule Number Rule Status Marking Ride QOS Rude Par amer z Distile Lamektss Marking Ride age Ride Ratus Enable Ki Condeicn Service Fiw Data febrer Type ANY Lei Service Flow Traffic Pricey Ce I Enable Servier Plow Media Flow Type Servier Flow Modis Flew Type Action Outer DSCP Markang D 3 D 1p Priority Marking D EI Inkra ASN Traffic QoS Rules Internal M
104. BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 2 The Equipment Manager The Equipment Editor 22 The Equipment Editor The Equipment Editor enables editing NMS Reference Location and Contact and SNMP parameters of a selected device For multiple devices it only enable editing the NMS Reference Location and Contact parameters It also enables defining the parameters of a new device that you wish adding to the database BTS NMS Reference Location ea Contact SNMP Parameters Read community E Write community OOOO O OS Retries 2 Timeout s D con Figure 2 2 The Equipment Editor for a Single Device Contact SE Update Figure 2 3 The Equipment Editor for Multiple Devices The Equipment Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description NMS Reference 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Sg Device Driver User Manual Chapter 2 The Equipment Manager The Equipment Editor Parameter Description Location Optional The location Region associated with the device in the database of the management system optional Click on the Browse icon to open the Select Location window and select a location Click the Eraser icon to clear the Location field Contact Optional The contact associated with the device in the database of the management system optional Click on the Browse icon to open the Select Contact window
105. Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor The UL DL Reference Classification Rule tables are applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates They includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Service Profile Number The index number of the Service Profile 1 64 Must be a number of a Service Profile that already exists in the target managed objects Service Flow Number The index number of the Service Flow 1 12 Must be a number of a Service Flow that already exists in the target managed objects UL DL Ref Classification The index number of the UL DL Reference Classification Rule 1 6 Rule Number Rule Name The name of the associated Classification Rule Must be a name of a Classification Rule that already exists in the target managed objects The UL DL Reference Classification Rule Row Editors include the same parameters as in the tables described above 4 4 2 6 Keep Alive Page L aa g D AAA Service Group Qos Mahing Dy V O Enable Keep Aive D C Polling Period see C Number of Retransmissions O Retransmission Timeout msec bk ga Refresh y Swe k Figure 4 20 The ASN GW Template Keep Alive Page The Keep Alive page is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The Keep Alive page includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The T
106. Configuration section includes the following parameter If it is disabled BS shall always reject MS initiation and request to enter idle mode If it is enabled BS would approve MS to enter the idle mode without being able to guarantee the required QoS for UGS Parameter Description Enable Idle Mode Ms Defines whether BS allows MS to enter idle mode initiated by the MS when Initiated For UGS there is a UGS connection available The default is Disable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 10 4 2 Mapping Tab 6 10 4 2 1 The Mapping tab enables defining Service Mapping rules on w 10 1 Services 255 243 41 0 0 3 oe Dene The Mapping tab includes the following sections Defintions Mapping Service Mapprry Rude Parameters Rule Index Rule Crier Rule Order b g R6 Profits Data Deivery Schecuing Type ANY ze Prenty jan j D Use Meda Fow Type Meda Fow Type O Use mn Reserved rafe Rate Mn Reserved Iraffic Rate He C Use max sustened Trafic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate ktos O Use Latercy Latency ms Map To Service Type Servie Name G do Figure 6 60 Services Page Mapping Tab Map to Rt Pafe O Mody Service QoS Paraneters Defa Priorty Prionty Date Delvery scheduing Type Mn Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustaned Traffi
107. D it becomes the new default for new BSs 3 Click OK The new BS will be added to the list of BS available in the BS node Up to 28 BSs can be defined 4 To complete the creation of the new BS you should select the newly added BS entry and complete the configuration of the mandatory Bandwidth and Central frequency parameters see Radio Basic Page General Tab on page 223 After clicking Apply you will be prompted to configure some additional mandatory parameters in the Airframe Structure General tab and Air Frame Structure Zones tab After configuring the requested parameters click Apply again gt To copy an existing BS 1 The Copy BS feature enables creation of a new BS based on the configuration of an existing BS To copy a BS right click the BS node in the navigation tree and select Copy BS to open the BS Selector window 2 From the list of available BSs select the BS you want to copy and click Select The Copy BS window will open with the values of the source BS used for BS ID LSB and Operator ID parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Copy BS BS ID LSB Frame Number Offset Operator ID Map Major Groups Bearer IP Default Authenticator IP Center Frequency Cell ID Preamble Group Segment Number Figure 6 42 Copy Existing BS Window 3 Configure the required
108. DI Uncepesadon Mode mye K WAN Araagei VAN Allowed WAND Max Frame e Dechba VLAN Transation O table vran ID Tranasdon GIE O B Doe Figure 6 9 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Lower Section The Site Connectivity tab includes the following sections E NMS Connectivity Mode E Site VLAN Configuration E Ethernet Ports E Backhaul VLAN Translation 6 6 1 1 NMS Connectivity Mode The NMS Connectivity Mode section enables separation of the bearer IP and NMS IP domains through definition of the connectivity mode The following NMS connectivity modes are available for selection 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Oo Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description In Band When In Band mode is selected the VLAN is used to differentiate between the bearer and external NMS IP domains on the DATA port The bearer VLAN is used for the bearer IP domain and the external management VLAN is used for the external NMS IP domain The MGMT port and CSCD Cascade port are assigned to the local management VLAN in this connectivity mode The CSCD port is not applicable for Outdoor BTS Out of Band When Out of Band mode is selected the bearer and external NMS IP domains are separated at the Ethernet interface The DATA port and bearer VLAN is used for the bearer IP domain and the MGMT port and external management VLAN is used for e
109. DP 10009 4 4 0 0 Management message not applicable exchange for between NPU Mini Centralized and AU ASN GW Internal Trivial File UDP 69 5 5 0 0 Management Transfer not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW External Telnet TCP 23 6 6 0 0 Management External SSH Remote TCP 22 7 7 0 0 Management Login Protocol External SNMP UDP 161 8 8 0 0 Management An ACL can be attached to the ASN GW In BTS equipment it can also be attached to the AUs or both ASN GW and AUs Excluding ACL 199 that cannot be attached to any interface You can create the following types of rules for an ACL E Allow Indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is allowed to reach the ASN GW and or AUs E Drop Indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is dropped and not allowed to reach the ASN GW and or AUs 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity You can configure multiple rules for each ACL the priority for these rules is applied with respect to the sequence in which these rules are configured By default in BTS equipment traffic towards the AUs is not restricted This is implemented through the pre configured ACL 1 which is available by default ACL 1 is attached to All AU with Rule Action Allow Source IP Address Any and Destination IP Address Any Several additional default ACLs are created automatic
110. Device Equipment Parameter Description Specification Electrical Down Tilt deg The downwards electrical tilt of the antenna in degrees The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Used only for information inventory purposes Installation Mechanical Down Tilt deg The downwards mechanical tilt of the antenna in degrees as opposed to the electrical tilt already integrated in the antenna and thus taken as reference instead of the horizontal plane The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Used only for information inventory purposes Heading deg The the azimuth angle in degrees between the center of the horizontal antenna beamwidth and the true north counting clockwise The range is from 0 to 359 Used only for information inventory purposes Cable Loss dB The attenuation in dB of the cable between the ODU port and antenna port The range is from 0 to 20 in 0 1 dB steps Used only for information inventory purposes Location Longitude deg The longitude of the antenna The format is Wl mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Used only for information inventory purposes Latitude deg The latitude of the antenna The format is Il mmm a Il is longitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is S south or N
111. Driver User Manual Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery Static Route must be configured whenever the EMS server and the NPU are on different subnets Run the following command npu config ip route A AAA Y Y Y Y Z Z Z Z x x x x y y y y is the network segment of the EMS server z z z z is the next hop IP address that should be in the segment of the external management interface 7 SNMP and Trap Managers Definition To define the communities to be used by the SNMP manager run the command npu config snmp mgr ReadCommunity public ReadWriteCommunity private For proper operation of the manager you should configure also the Trap Manager parameters and enable sending traps to the defined Trap Manager a npu config trap mgr ip source x x x x port 162 TrapCommunity public x x x x is the IP address of the EMS server b npu config trap mgr enable ip source x x x x Note that if the management system is behind a NAT router the NAT Outside IP address the IP of the router s interface connected in the direction of the managed device LAN must be defined in the device as a Trap Manager with traps sending enabled In the NAT router Port Forwarding NAT Traversal must be configured for UDP and TCP ports 161 and 162 from Outside IP connected to the managed device s LAN to Inside IP connected to the management system s LAN 8 Site ID Definition To define the site ID BTS Number npu config site identifier x x is the u
112. Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Backup Configuration Task Backup Configuration Fie Type Ste Configuration dM Backup current device configuration Backup an older device configuration Source Equipment IP Address 4M MacroBTS 10 10 1945 O80 Gi bel Eed iz Figure 8 4 Backup Task Editor The Backup Task editor comprises the following fields Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters The default name includes the task s type and the date and time at which the task was created backup_task_ lt yyyymmddhhmmsss gt Note that when using the Task Wizard the default task name automatically replaces the name selected in the first Create New Task step File Type The type of backup file E Site Configuration The entire site configuration E Logging The NPU SW modules log files 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Backup Configuration Task Parameter Description Backup Current Older Available below the File Type selection field only if the selected File Type is Configuration Options Site Configuration Select one of the following E Backup Current Device Configuration Select to retrieve the current configuration of the source device s The file will be created by the device upon getting the request from the management system E Backup an older device configuration Select to retrieve one of the previo
113. E ae EE 7 Figure 2 2 The Equipment Editor for a Single Device EE 11 Figure 2 3 The Equipment Editor for Multiple Devices 11 Figure 3 1 Network Maintenance Retrieval of MS Data 16 Figure 3 2 Network Maintenance Retrieval of All MSs Data 18 Figure 3 3 Network Maintenance Single MS De Heoietraton 21 Figure 3 4 Network Maintenance All MSs DeHeotstration 22 Figure 4 1 The Template Managet cccccccessseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseesaeeeeseeeeesessseeneeseneeeeens 25 Figure 4 2 The Template Editor snaccccsercdsxtsasnntcineredaninavaccecendiaeneecdedepdndenedsetiareetgeinaceiaescnoreeeeetaade 29 Figure 4 3 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Client Tab 33 Figure 4 4 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Access Tab 34 Figure 4 5 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab Add Rows to Tables Templat EE 35 Figure 4 6 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Add Rows to Tables TS AUG EE 37 Figure 4 7 The ASN GW Template QoS Marking Page Add Rows to Tables Template 42 Figure 4 8 The ASN GW Template SFA Page SFA Config Tab 44 Figure 4 9 The ASN GW Template SFA Page PHS Rules Tab Add Rows to Tables Template 45 Figure 4 10 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Config Tab Add Rows to Tables Template E 46 Figure 4 11 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Protocol Tab 47 Figure 4 12 The ASN GW Template SFA
114. Frame Structure Tab E Triggers Tab 4 4 3 1 1 General Def Tab D Connectivity Basie C Connectivity Advanced O sirves USsedDd RF jf Base Bare idle Mode As Int Frame Structure Triggers 8 E ren rae OPK 1 Repettion 6 w E Basic Rate for Management QPSK 172 Repetition Kc Figure 4 21 The BS Template Radio Basic Page General Def Tab The General Def tab is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The General Def parameters are 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Basic Rate The uplink basic rate QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 Basic Rate for Management The downlink basic rate for management QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 4 3 1 2 RF Tab The Template Configuration Editor Eee O Center Frequency ae Rasen ss n Figure 4 22 The BS Template Radio Basic Page RF Tab The RF tab is not applicable for Add R
115. Keep Alive is enabled checked Polling Period The period In seconds between polling sessions The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds Polling Period x 1000 value in milliseconds cannot be lower than Retransmission Timeout x Number of Retransmissions 1 Number of Retransmissions Maximum number of retries if Retransmission Timeout has expired without getting a response The range is from 1 to 10 Retransmission Timeout Time in milliseconds to wait for a response before initiating another polling attempt or reaching a decision that the polled entity has failed if the maximum number of retries set by Number of Retransmissions has been reached The range is from 100 to 10000 milliseconds 0 1 to 10 second 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 10 4 Services Page The Services page enables you to define the BS Service parameters that affect the properties of the HARQ mechanism for each Service and allows you to define Service Mapping Rules The Services page includes the following tabs E Definitions Tab E Mapping Tab 6 10 4 1 Definitions Tab T on 101014413 Femme ag Services 255 243 41 0 0 3 DERES Poora Serves Name Maximum DA Maximum UL Service Nama Maximum D Retransmissions ale Mannan Uk Retransmissions Pagng Cycle ei Frames Pagng Offs
116. L a specific combination of all applicable parameters Source IP Address Source IP Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Mask Minimum Source Port maximum Source Port Minimum Destination Port Maximum Destination Port Protocol cannot be defined in more than one rule 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Management Page 6 7 6 7 1 Management Page The Management page comprises two tabs E Managers List Tab E Performance Tab E Logging Tab Managers List Tab The Managers List tab enables managing the lists of Authorized SNMP Managers and SNMP Trap Managers Management Managers List Performance Logging SNMP Mangers Manager Number Read Community Write Communty i puk private Add Manages E SNMP Trap Managers 1P Address Port Number Community Enable Site Traps ness elei cash v m Dore Figure 6 14 Management Page Managers List Tab The Managers List tab includes the following sections E SNMP Managers E SNMP Trap Managers 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Management Page 6 7 1 1 SNMP Managers An SNMP Manager comprises a pair of SNMP Communities Read Community and Write Community A management station is permitted to manage the BTS using SNMP only if it uses one of the confi
117. Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description Local In Site and Rack An optional description of the physical location of the BTS shelf in the site rack A string of up to 32 characters 5 2 4 2 Site Location Parameter Description Latitude The latitude of the site Typically should not be configured as it is received from the GPS receiver The format is Il mmm a ll is latitude in degrees between 00 and 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is N north or S south Longitude The longitude of the site Typically should not be configured as it is received from the GPS receiver The format is Il mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 and 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Altitude The altitude in meters of the site Typically should not be configured as it is received from the GPS receiver The Altidude is in meters from 300 0 to 9000 0 5 2 4 3 Connectivity Parameter Description Bearer IP Address The IP address of the Bearer Interface Must be unique in the network The default is 172 16 0 1 Not applicable if ASN Topology is Centralized ASN GW External Management IP Address The IP address of the External Management Interface Must be unique in the network The default is 192 168 1 1 Not applicable same as Bearer if NMS Connectivity Mode is Unified
118. Max Sustained Traffic Rate If enabled checked the service lookup function will try to match the Service Flow Max Sustained Traffic Rate with the Max Sustained Traffic Rate entry see below If disabled the service lookup function will ignore the Max Sustained Traffic Hate Max Sustained Traffic Rate for R6 An internal R6 profile parameter specifying the maximum sustained traffic rate in Kbps Applicable only for relevant data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY The range is 0 40000 A value of 1 indicates that the parameter is not used Use Latency If enabled checked the service lookup function will try to match the Service Flow Latency with the Latency entry see below If disabled the service lookup function will ignore the Latency Latency for R6 An R6 parameter entry in the lookup table specifying the maximum tolerated latency in milliseconds Applicable only for relevant data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR The range is 0 5000 A value of 1 indicates that the parameter is not used 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Modify Service QoS Indicates whether to modify service QoS parameters using internal R1 profile Parameters parameters If disabled only the Default Priority parameter is applicable All other parameters below are no
119. N GW O Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 2 4 Power Control Tab es Ranging Feedback Alocatia Neighbor Advertisement Power Control Management Here Negutiatunat TES Trigge Setup QuS GD PUK Zone dum S L 7 Mxcimum EaP dem ack a8 BD care J Coma d8 O PK 1 2 8 Dox ae ton B eOan 1 2 8 O Qam aj a E 64 QAM 12 8 O 64 QAM 2 3 8 oa lt gt le lcaj lca le gt lt 2 lea ku o ef 3 4 E 64 Qam 5 6 cB a o G Power Control Correction Factor dB tales Gz Figure 4 30 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control parameters are Parameter Description PUSC Zone The target noise and interference level for the PUSC zone in dBm The range is from 130 to 110 in steps of 0 5 dBm ACK The C N in dB required for sending ACK reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB CO The C N in dB required for sending CQI reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for ACK 8 to Required C N Level for ACK 7 see ACK parameter above CDMA The C N in dB required for transmitting CDMA reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Lev
120. N GW Template SFA Page SFA Config Tab The SFA Config tab is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The SFA Config tab include the following parameter Parameter Description Enable PHS Support Indicates whether or not PHS is enabled or disabled This setting applies to all PHS rules in the managed object 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 4 2 PHS Rules Tab B 1 25 L asncw C Service Group L Qos Marking Om Service Profie PRS Rules Classification Contig Classiication Ride Protocol Classification Rule Source Address Classification Rule Destination Address Classica lt gt pad X lt p Revert PHS Rule Number WE PHS Rule Marber Name LJ Name C Fiod Yake O Mask value bs i verfy vake D O Swe Va Bytes lt cA eech v swe EEE Figure 4 9 The ASN GW Template SFA Page PHS Rules Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The PHS Rules tab is applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The PHS Rules table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description PHS Rule Number The index number of the PHS Rule 1 255 Name The name alias of the PHS Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The PHS Rule Row Editor includes the following para
121. NPU should obtain the GPS time for frame synchronization and send it to the AUs The available options are E hourly E daily E monthly E yearly Read GPS Time At Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The time when the NPU should obtain the GPS time for frame synchronization The format is hh mm ss dd mm hh between 0 and 23 mm between 0 and 59 ss between 0 and 59 dd mm with usual date and month rules 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page 6 5 3 2 Synchronization not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Synchronization section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Maximum Number of The minimum number of received satellites required for maintaining Satellites for Sync Loss synchronization The range is from 0 to 11 Must be lower than Minimum Number of Satellites for Sync Return Minimum Number of The minimum number of received satellites required for the GPS to Satellites for Sync Return resynchronize so that the NPU can terminate holdover Stop AU transmission After Indicates whether the AU modules should stop data transmission if the GPS lost Maximum Time in Holdover synchronization with its satellites and the holdover passed timeout has occured State True or False When True the AU will stop transmitting after being in holdover state for more than Holdover Passed Timeou
122. NPU Counters and AU Counters tables includes the following parameter for each row Parameter Description Performance Group The Counters Group to be activated deactivated Not applicable for Update Activation Multiple Rows templates The NPU Counters and AU Counters Row Editors includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Activation Performance Group The Counters Group to be activated deactivated Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Group Activation Defines whether collection of performance counters for the group will be activated deactivated 4 4 4 3 Note that in the current release the following AU Counters cannot be activated in the managed objects De Registration Mobility Network Entry Idle Mode Fast Feedback CQI Handling Ack Nack Channel Handling End Transaction Update Tx R1 Net Traffic Rx R1 Net Traffic DL HARQ Sub Bursts Drops DL HARQ Transmission Logging Page The Logging page is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The Logging page comprises the following tabs NPU Logging Tab Log Severity Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 4 3 1 NPU Logging
123. Network Maintenance x E Template manager x Al Duplicate Ste x l N Twin Site Creation BSs Source B5 BS IDISB l 12 12 53 BS Name New BS BS ID ISB Paging Group ID Bearer IP ES Name Center Frequency MHz Cell 1D Preamble Group Segment Number Frame Number Offset Map Major Groups Ki cancel Back _Next _ Duplicate Site Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 5 5 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 4 The fourth screen of the wizard includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source BS up to 6 BS IDLSB The unique identifier of the BS BS Name The name of the BS New BS BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS The management system will reject a BS ID LSB already assigned to another BS in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 Paging Group ID The Paging Group ID of the BS Applicable only if Idle Mode is enabled The range is from 0 to 65535 Must be set to a value other than 0 Must be unique per BS Bearer IP Address The IP address of the BS s Bearer Interface BS Name The name of the BS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 printable characters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description Cente
124. Not applicable for Standard ACL Not 65535 applicable for ACL 199 Protocol 1 255 Not applicable for Standard ACL In ACL 255 199 the valid values are 6 TCP and 17 UDP Rule Action Allow Drop Not applicable for ACL 199 Allow 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW oz Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Classifier ID Applicable only for ACL 199 The list of existing classifier IDs A classifier ID cannot be associated to more than one rule 1 QoS Marking Rules Page Marking Actions Flag E DSCP DSCP amp Priority E DSCP amp Priority E Priority DSCP 0 63 0 Priority 0 7 where 0 is the lowest and 7 is the highest 0 QoS Marking Classifiers Classifier ID 1 65535 N A Action ID E Existing Action IDs An Action ID cannot be null associated with more than one Classifier Management Page Managers List Tab SNMP Managers up to 5 Read Communityy String up to 10 characters case sensitive Write Community String up to 10 characters case sensitive SNMP Trap Managers up to 5 IP Address Valid IP address N A Port Number 1 65535 162 Community String up to 10 characters case sensitive public Enable Site Traps E Enable Enable E Disable Management Page Performance Tab Performance Collection Interval E 15 minutes not config
125. Parameter Range Default Type E iP IP E VPWS QinQ E VPWS Transparent E VPWS Mapped Service Interface Name One of the defined service interface names The first existing name DHCP Function Mode E Server Server E Proxy E Relay Lease Time The range is 24 4294967295 seconds Not 86 400 applicable in DHCP Relay mode DHCP Own IP Address Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 In DHCP Server mode the source IP address must be inside the range allocated for users address pool as provisioned in the DHCP Function Editor For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 Enable Service VLAN Enable Disable check box Disable MS MS Loopback Enable Disable check box Enable VID Mapping Range Start 1 4094 N A End 1 4094 N A Accounting Accounting Mode None Time Time Volume Time Interim Interval 0 none 5 1600 minutes 5 DHCP Function Server Proxy Mode Address Configuration 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Primary DNS Server Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 IP Address Pool From Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 IP Address Pool To Valid IP address
126. RE Ep AN Your Open WiMAX Choice 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver for AlvariSTAR Device Driver User Manual SW Version 2 5 2 December 2009 P N 215493 Document History Document History updates improvements Topic Description Date Issued Version Number and date Updated versions numbers November 2008 Cover page About this Manual Managing a BTS Site Updated to reflect Device Driver version November 2008 Chapter 2 2 5 1 19 and managed device s NPU SW version 2_5 1_8 Parameters Summary Updated to reflect Device Driver version November 2008 Chapter 4 2 5 1 19 and managed device s NPU SW version 2_5 1 8 Manual s Name Device Manager replaced by Device Driver December 2008 Using the Device Manager Chapter Chapter was removed Its contents now form December 2008 the first section in Managing a BTS Site Enabling Discovery New Chapter December 2008 The Equipment Manager New Chapter December 2008 Tasks Chapter Completely revised Overview section December 2008 removed updated version exists in the Infrastructure Manual All Task sections updated and modified The File Manager New Chapter December 2008 Offline Configuration Manager New Chapter December 2008 The Performance Viewer Updated December 2008r Managing a BTS Site and Updated to reflect 2 5 beta versions of NPU December 2008 Parameters Summa
127. Rows to Tables T Ci olate x sccssenw nececcenassenceceumminnsed vemetencesstagaaiur eanaasausateseadi miensenieneriees 94 Figure 4 44 The Management Template Performance Page NPU Counters Tab Add Rows to Tables Templat EE 95 Figure 4 45 The Management Template Logging Page NPU Logging Tab 97 Figure 4 46 The Management Template Logging Page Log severity Tab 98 Figure KN EE e neern nnet 105 Figure 5 2 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 ss sessseessiessrssrinsirtriretiiserinstitnsrnntirnrrinsrnnee 106 Figure 5 3 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 107 Figure 5 4 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 ccecccessceeseccceeseeeseeneeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeneneeeenenee 109 Figure 5 5 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 4 nret 112 Figure 5 6 Twin Site Creation Wizard Grenb ccccececeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeceeeeseneeees 114 Figure 6 1 The Device Manager Components Indoor BI 119 Figure 6 2 Site View Page Indoor BTS aneres tee e ege AEN 124 Figure 6 3 Site View Page Outdoor A E 126 Figure 6 4 Site View Page Mini Centralized AN GW 129 Figure 6 5 Site Page General Tab DI 130 Figure 6 6 Site Page Dry Content Tab 134 Figure 6 7 Site Page Time Tab BI 137 Figure 6 8 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Upper Section AE 140 Figure 6 9 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Lower Section AE 141 Figure 6 10 IP Interface EE 146 Figure 6 11 IP Routing RE 148 Figure 6 12 QoS Marking Rules Page sssssss
128. S ID For ASCII Agent Circuit ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box Agent Remote ID Suboption 2 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Remote ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID For ASCII Agent Remote ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box Agent Subscriber ID Suboption 6 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Subscriber ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain For ASCII Agent Subscriber ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box 0 9 3 QoS Marking Page The QoS Marking page enables managing QoS marking rules for the bearer plane based on parameters such as traffic priority and the type of service media and interface For each marking rule you can define the output parameters outer DSCP and VLAN p
129. Serving BS distance from the MS calculated by measuring the round trip delay mandoverneqhest is above the Trigger threshold in meter 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 2 Radio Advanced Page The Radio Advanced page is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The Radio Advanced page comprises the following tabs E Ranging Tab E Feedback Allocations Tab E Neighbor Advertisement Tab E Power Control Tab E Management Tab E Handover Negotiation at TBS Tab E Trigger Setup Tab E QoS Tab 4 4 3 2 1 Ranging Tab B 6 2 L ps 3 Radio Basic 1 Connectivity Basie 3 Connectivity Advanced L services CG lee Raman Feedba ageet ed Advertisement Power Contrai Management Handover Neyotistnst TES Trgyer Setup G E start of Rangra Codes ofS SW Hamm Coll Radins km fE Di 7 Refresh IL Save Kess Figure 4 27 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Ranging Tab The Ranging parameters are 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ge Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Start of Ranging Codes The starting number of the group of codes used for the uplink The avilable options are 0 64 128 192 Maximum Cell Radius
130. The AU Port Number to which the Power Feeder Port is connected 1 4 or None In addition the page includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Power Feeder Adds a new Power Feeder to the table Up to 4 Power Feedes may be configured Each Power Feeder includes 4 entries for Port Number 1 to 4 Note that each combination of AU Slot Number and AU Port Number cannot appear in more than one entry excluding combinations with None value Delete Deletes the selected Power Feeder from the table You must select all 4 entries of a Power Feeder to delete it 6 8 2 5 Antenna Page The Antenna page enables defining the properties of the site s antennas The Antenna page comprises two sections The Antennas List and the Antennas Parameter Editor section ZPRZR 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Antenna Product Type def auk Port defouk2port0S defeukzportDs def aR2portDS defouk2port0S defaukzportS def auk2portDS defauk2port0s detatzpogrz det uk2portDS def ukpar defaukzportos det a2portDS defouk2 ports defaukzportDs defaukzportDs det ai defauk2portS defeuRzportDS def auk2portDS defauk2portlS defeuRzportDS def auk2portDS defauk2port0S Arterna Parameters Steeg Product Type Je Information Deserption Specticaton Blectricad Down T Installation Mechsrical Down TR Heading Cable Loss Location Leegte L ttude Tower Height A Seel e m
131. The Triggers tab is not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Each row in the table includes a trigger name To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row configuration window will open enabling you to select a Trigger Name from the drop down list The Trigger Names must be selected taking into account the relevant existing Trigger Names in the target objects that will participate in the Multiple Configuration task using the template In an Add Rows to Tables template a Trigger Name that already exist in the managed object will be rejected In an Update Parameters template a Trigger Name that does not exist in the managed object will be rejected After clicking OK in the row configuration window a new row with the selected Trigger Name is added to the table colored green and the parameters editor for the row is displayed on the right side allowing you to configure parameters for the new object After completing configuration of the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The color of the new row will change to black As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor To delete a previously saved row selec
132. a Single Device Using the Device Manager 6 1 2 The Device Manager Components on 10 10 144 194 Configuring Equipment Title Bar e JS see 4747 N Site Ose J Page Name GB Connectivity Lineage General Dry Contact Time Equipment a DN ASN cw Properties ASN Topology e DES BTS Number 4747 Current QI Site Sector BTS Name j Distributed AEN BTS Location Product Type MM Configured S Location in Site and Rack Distributed ASN GW Navigation O centred As GW Pane ae Longitude f E 3 Latitude 5 N La Akkude Selected Page So g Control Buttons gt teres sooty core lt Status Progress Bar Figure 6 1 The Device Manager Components Indoor BTS The Device Manager window comprises the following components Component Description Title Bar Identifies the managed device s name It also includes standard icons for minimizing maximizing or closing the Device Manager Page Name The name of the current page Navigation Pane Displays all configuration information pages and enables opening a selected page by clicking on it Selected Page The selected page Enables viewing managing the applicable parameters Status Bar Indicates the status of the current operation and displays a progress bar when applicable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager 6 1 3 Common Con
133. a match The value of this parameter must be different for each row instance The range is from 1 to 255 6 10 4 2 2 2 R6 Profile The R6 Profile section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Data Delivery Scheduling An R6 parameter entry in the lookup table specifying the data delivery type Type service type UGS RT VR NRT VR BE ERT VR ertPS or ANY Priority An R6 parameter entry in the lookup table specifying the traffic priority 0 7 or ANY 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Use Media Flow Type If enabled checked the service lookup function will try to match the Service Flow Media Flow Type with the Media Flow Type entry see below If disabled the service lookup function will ignore the Media Flow Type Media Flow Type An R6 parameter entry in the lookup table that is relevant only if the Use Media Flow Type option is enabled A string of up to 32 characters Use Min Reserved Traffic Rate If enabled checked the service lookup function will try to match the Service Flow Min Reserved Traffic Rate with the Min Reserved Traffic Rate entry see below If disabled the service lookup function will ignore the Min Reserved Traffic Rate Min Reserv
134. ab enables defining the basic radio parameters i Ge 4 Basic 0 0 2 0 12 148 General Ar Frame Structure General Ar Frame Structure Zones Mobility Seat io ee Dente So pose w aswy Figure 6 43 Radio Basic Page General Tab The General tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name of the BS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 printable characters BS Identification Operator ID Read only The unique operator identifier The same Operator ID must be used by all BSs throughout the radio access network BS IDLSB Read only The unique ID of the BS This ID must be unique within the radio access network Radio Parameters Bandwidth The BS channel bandwidth 5 MHz 7 MHz 10MHz 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 223 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Center frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are HM 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 BW 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3402 5 to 3597 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3602 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 E See also note below regarding dependency on configured Bandwid
135. age Diversity Tab E Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab E Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab E Radio Advanced Page Management Tab E Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab 6 10 2 2 1 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab The Feedback tab enables defining various ranging parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Advanced 255 243 41 0 0 3 Feedback Drversty Power Control Mobility Management Ge Ranging Start of Ranging Codes o TR COMA Allocations Period Frames KIRJE Marium Col Radus Xm Wl 17 Betresn e m Dore Figure 6 48 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab The Feedback tab includes the following ranging parameters Parameter Description Start of Ranging Codes The starting number of the group of codes used for the uplink The avilable options are 0 64 128 192 IR CDMA Allocation Period The period of IR CDMA allocations in frames The available options are 1 2 4 6 8 10 Maximum Cell Radius The naximum cell radius in km The available values are 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 10 2 2 2 Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab The Diversity tab enables configuratio
136. aining service flows including configuring Packet Header Suppression PHS rules multiple service profiles with multiple service flows and classification rules The SFA page includes the following tabs E PHS Rules Tab E Classification Rules Tab In addition the Service Profile sub node of the SFA node enables creating new service profiles and viewing modifying service profiles PHS Rules Tab The PHS Rules tab enables defining rules for Packet Header Suppression PHS PHS rules are provisioned on a per service profile name basis mi X SFA PHS Rules Classification Rules PHS Rules Enable PHS Support PHS Rule Number I Name Field Value Mask Value bits Verify Value I Size Value Bytes Add PHS Rule Delete BeA P Refresh vi Apply Figure 6 35 SFA Page PHS Rules Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The PHS Rules tab includes the Enable PHS Support check box and the PHS Rules table Parameter Description Enable PHS Support Indicates whether or not PHS is enabled or disabled This setting applies to all PHS rules The PHS Rules table includes the following parameters Parameter Description PHS Rule Number The index number of the PHS rule An auto sequential number from 1
137. all counters groups available for the device 7 3 The Counters Selection Section The counters selection section enables you to select specific counters to define the polling interval for the on line display and to define the graph s values scale for each of the selected counters The counters selection section displays all the counters applicable to the counters group selected in the counters groups selection section Use the Expand Collapse check boxes name to view hide all counters available in the group To the right of each counter the following details are available E The color of the graph for this counter available only for a selected counter E The current graph s value of the counter E The scale value for the graph see details below gt To view the graph of a counter Select the check box to the left of a counter to add it to the graph and view its details The color to be used in the graph for the selected counters is displayed to the right of the counter gt To change the color of a counter s graph Click on the color display on the right side of the selected counter The Pick a Color window opens allowing you to change the color s properties Deselect the check box to terminate the on line display of the counter Select again to continue the display x NOTE You can also select deslect all the counters in a group or all counters in the relevant device using the relevant check box s 4Mo
138. ally to allow some restricted traffic towards the NPU These ACL rules are applied automatically at the time of NPU startup or upon a change of IP address of various interfaces All the following automatically created standard default ACLs are attached to the NPU virtual interface and include a single Permit rule Table 6 1 Default Standard ACLs ACL Number Rule Action Source IP Address Destination IP Address ACL 96 not Allow Any Internal Management IP address applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW ACL 97 Allow Any External Management IP address ACL 98 Allow Any Local Management IP address The default Extended ACL 186 attached to the NPU virtual interface includes the following Allow rules allowing certain traffic towards the Bearer interface Table 6 2 Rules of Default ACL 186 Rule Action Source IP Address Source Port Destination IP Address Destination Port Protocol Allow Any Any Bearer IP address Any ICMP 1 Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 2231 used for WiMAX ASN Control Plane Protocol UDP 17 Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 1812 1813 used for RADIUS Authenticatio n and Accounting UDP 17 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Table 6 2 Rules of Default ACL 186 Connectivity Rul
139. also not conflict with CVID of any transparent MS Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IPs Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address Must be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface Subnet mask is taken as default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 Service Groups up to 10 Number An automatically generated number from 1 up to 10 Service Name The name alias of the service group A string of 1 to 15 characters Must be unique in the device Type The Service Group s type IP VPWS service groups are not supported by the wizard 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description DHCP Mode The DHCP function mode E Server The ASN GW function as a DHCP server that allocates an IP address to the MS from the local pool in the non HA mode E Relay The IP address is obtained using an external DHCP server in the non HA mode E Proxy Non HA mode In Non HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns the MS the IP address that was received from AAA in th
140. ame of the Service Group to be used by the service flow Must be the name of a Service Group that already exists in the target managed objects Uplink Min Reserved Traffic Rate Kbps The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kops for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 40000 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Uplink Max Latency ms The maximum latency in ms allowed in the uplink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR Uplink Tolerated Jitter ms the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this uplink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Interval ms Uplink Unsolicited Grant The nominal interval in ms between successive data grant opportunities for this uplink service flow The range is 0 65535 Must be lower than Uplink Max Latency Relevant only for uplink service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR Downlin
141. ameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description ASN GW ASN GW NAS ID The unique identifier of the ASN GW NAS Sent in Access Request message only if configured Should be in FQDN format Up to 64 characters Service Interfaces up to 10 Number An automatically generated number from 1 up to 10 Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 15 characters Must be unique in the device Type The type of service interface IP in IP or VLAN Description A brief desciption of the service interface A string of up to 70 characters Tunnel Source IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface The source IP address that indicates the point of origin of the tunnel for the service interface Set to the value of the Bearer Interface IP Address and cannot be modified Tunnel Destination IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface The destination IP address that indicates the point of termination of the tunnel for the service interface Service VLAN ID Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The Service Interface VLAN ID parameter The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 A Service Interface VLAN ID must not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID and VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management and External Management interaces It must
142. anegemerk Traffic QoS Rules Dilfsery Code Pot b 2 Diffsery Code Point 1 E 802 Ip Priority D DI 802 1p Priorty 1 E O ch Betrest a r Core Figure 6 57 Connectivity Advanced Page QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab includes the following sections 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gei Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device E Bearer Traffic QoS Rules E Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules HM Internal Management Traffic QoS Rules 6 10 3 2 2 1 Bearer Traffic QoS Rules The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules section includes the Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table and the QoS Rule Parameters Editor The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table displays the following read only parameters for each existing QoS rule Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the rule An auto sequential number generated automatically when creating a new rule Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Marking Rule The name of the QoS Marking Rule Select an entry to open the Editor for the selected rule The following buttons are available below the table Parameter Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Editor allowing to configure parameters for the new rule Up to a maximum of 16383 rules can be defined Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table The QoS Rule Para
143. anual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor The Classification Rule Source Address tab is applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The Classification Rule Source Address table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Source Address parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules IP Source Number The index of the IP Source IP Source Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule The Classification Rule Source Address Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Source Address parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules IP Source Number The index of the IP Source IP Source Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule IP Source Address Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The IP source address enabled for the classification rule IP Source Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP source addresses Enable IP Source Classifer
144. arameters related to Idle Mode Added Basic Rate parameters moved from previous Radio Advanced Page Rate Adaptation Tab Removed Max Sub Burst Size and Target Packet Error Rate August 2009 Services Page Mapping Tab Removed SDU Size Updated limitation in Service Name Updated supported options for R1 Profile Data Delivery Scheduling Type Updated limitations for R1 Profile Priority Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate Latency Updated range for R6 Profile parameters Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate Updated range for Map to R1 Profile parameters Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate August 2009 Duplicate Site Manager New name was previously Offline Configuration Manager August 2009 Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation wizard Step 2 Modified structure Updated range for Site Address Added IP Routing section Added comments on applicability of Connectivity parameters August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation wizard Step 3 Added Service Interfaces section August 2009 Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation wizard Step 4 Updated names of some parameters Removed Number Of Sub Channels UL Data Zone Added Paging Group ID Up
145. arer plane QoS rule UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR or ANY The Service Flow Data Delivery Type of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow Traffic Priority The traffic priority provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule 0 7 or ANY The Service Flow Traffic Priority of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow Media Flow Type The media type provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule A value of ANY indicates that this parameter will be ignored A string of 1 to 30 characters The Service Flow Media Flow Type of an existing rule cannot be modified Action Outer DSCP Marking The Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value to be used for marking the packets if the packet complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from 0 to 63 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic that complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from 0 to 7 6 9 4 SFA Page The Service Flow Authorization SFA functionality handles creation maintenance of pre provisioned service flows for MS It maps the AAA parameters service profile name received from the AAA server to pre configured WiMAX specific QoS parameters in the NPU 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 6 9 4 1 The SFA page enables configuring and maint
146. backup Configuration file E Duplicate Site A Duplicate Site configuration file E Vendor Configuration A vendor configuration file Name For a new Restore Task click on the Browser button to open the applicable Selector windoe according to the selected Type above and select the file to be used by the task Creation Date The read only creation date of the selected file Source Equipment Applicable only for Site Configuration Restore task The details of the source equipment of the selected backup configuration file Auto Reset Click to automatically reset the target equipment after successful completion of the Restore task The Target Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system BTS Number The number of the device Site ID as configured in the device BTS Name The name of the device as configured in the device NE Type The device type IP Address The IP address of the device For Site Configuration and Duplicate Site Restore tasks the Target Equipment table includes only the read only details of the target equipment For a Site Configuration Restore task the target equipment is identical to the source equipment The details are available only if the State of the target site is Up For a Vendor Configuration Restore
147. be added to the list of AU Slot available in the AU sub node 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment gt 6 8 1 4 To delete an AU To delete an AU right click the required AU Slot entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation IMPORTANT An associated AU specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector Page on page 263 AU Slot Page not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The AU node includes an AU slot page for each created AU For details on creation deletion of AU entities refer to Creating Deleting an AU not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 172 The AU Slot Page displays the properties of the respective AU card The AU Slot page includes the following tabs E AU Card Properties Tab E AU Control Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment 6 8 1 4 1 AU Card Properties Tab The Card Properties tab displays configuration and status information for the AU card in the designated slot Co Le J 4 AU Slot 2 Card Properties Control Requred Type Serial Number HW Version Number HW Revision Number Boot SW Version Number IF Version Number IF Revision Number Operakionsl SW version Number
148. be deactivated E Volume and time based Applicable only for IP Service Groups Functionality is the same as for Time option above In addition this mode supports postpaid accounting by supporting IP Session Volume Based Accounting The ASN GW will report the cumulative volume counters for each MS IP Session The counters will be collected per MS Service Flow and will be cumulated in order to get the MS IP Session counters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Relay Agent Information Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode Enable Disable Relay Agent Information Option 82 All following parameters are applicable only if Relay Agent Information is enabled Agent Circuit ID and Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Suboption 1 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Circuit ID Binary Free String Full NAIl Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID For ASCII Agent Circuit ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box Agent Remote ID a
149. be unique in the device The Service Profile Config Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Profile Number The index number of the Service Profile 1 64 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the Service Profile A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Profile Status Indicates whether the profile is enabled or disabled when adding a new service profile the status can t be enabled only after associating a service flow the status can be updated to enabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 4 2 5 2 D 2 Le Aow C Servie Goup L Qos marking Fa The Template Configuration Editor Service Flow Tab Service Prete Cortig Servie Flow UA Reference Classification Rule Di Relererce Classification Rude ed KS e ees Ce ai x C Revert A Service Profile number Flow Number view Meche Grow LS j GD Convergence Sublayer Type LI Meda Flow Type C Upik Data Detvery Type Di C eet max sustained Traffic Rate Mee S C Upik frai Pricey br CU Downink Data Debvery Type O Downlink Max Sustained Traffic Rate kbps s G Goeek Traffic Priorty gt O Reference Service Group I Uplink Min Reserved Traffic Rate kbps s GD Upik Max Late
150. ble for Mini Centralized ASN GW Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab The Mobility tab enables defining various handover negotiation parameters including Trigger setup TBS settings and neighbor advertisement broadcast settings j Advanced 255 243 41 0 0 3 Feeda Dwversky Power Control Mobility Management Ge Handover TRS Handover Defaut Gomm fe a A Fast Rangng Allocations Wigner Setup Averaging Duration LO Neighbor Advertisment Drosdeast bere ce Brest Aerh KH Figure 6 51 Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab The Mobility tab includes the following sections E TBS E Trigger Setup E Neighbor Advertisement Broadcast TBS The TBS Target BS section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Time Handover Default Action The number of frames until allocation of non contention based opportunity at a target BS The range is from 0 to 255 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Fast Ranging Allocations The number of frames until allocation of non contention based opportunity at a target BS The range is from 0 to 255 6 10 2 2 4 2 Trigger Setup The Trigger Setup section includes the following parameter Parameter Description Averaging Duration The default RSSI avera
151. by the source device using the real time clock of the device The format is E bkupCrtCfg file lt date amp time gt xml gz E bkupOlderCfg file lt date amp time gt xml gz E bkupLogging lt date amp time gt log gz E performance ptf_ lt date amp time gt xml gz Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility File Type The type of file E bkupCrtCfg A configuration backup file requested for current configuration E bkupOlderCfg A configuration backup file requested for an older configuration E bkupLogging A logging file E performance A performance collection file Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Date The date and time at which the file was added to the database of the management system using the real time clock of the client Status The status of the file Normal Orphan a backup file for a device that was removed from the database Imported for an imported file Select one or several entries and right click to view the following file management options 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 The File Manager Equipment File Manager Parameter Description Restore Applicable only if one configuration file current or older is selected Opens the Restore Task Editor for the selected configuration backup file enabling to restore the configuration See Restore Configuration Task on page 285 The Restore Task Editor can also be
152. c Rate Latency Hrer ie i Service Mapping Rule Parameters Table R6 Profile Map to Service Type Map to R1 Profile Service Mapping Rule Parameters Table The Service Mapping Rule Parameters table includes the following read only parameters for each service mapping rule z taren oaet L Parameter Description Rule Index The rule s sequential number An auto sequential number starting from 1 up to a maximum of 255 Rule Order Defines the order in which the rules are enforced 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Select an entry to open the Service Mapping Rule Editor for the selected entry The Service Mapping Rule Parameters table also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Rule Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Service Mapping Rule Editor allowing configuration of parameters for the new rule Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table 6 10 4 2 2 Service Mapping Rule Editor The Editor includes the following sections E Rule Order E R6 Profile E Map to Service Type E Map to R1 Profile 6 10 4 2 2 1 Rule Order The Rule Order section includes the following parameter Parameter Description Rule Order Defines the order in which the rows of the table are checked to find
153. cable not applicable for all device types In This Chapter E Using the Device Manager on page 118 E Introduction to Device Management on page 122 E Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment on page 124 E Site Page on page 130 E Connectivity on page 140 E Management Page on page 159 E Equipment on page 167 E ASN GW on page 188 E BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 217 M Site Sector not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 263 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager 6 1 Using the Device Manager Introduction to the Device Manager on page 118 The Device Manager Components on page 119 Common Control Buttons on page 120 Working with Configuration Tables on page 120 6 1 1 Introduction to the Device Manager The Device Manager enables managing a single device and its components if applicable gt To open the Device Manager for a selected device In the Equipment Manager double click on the selected entity or select it and click on the Configure button or right click on it and select the Configure option in the pop up window The Device Manager for the selected entity opens displaying the main page for the device 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing
154. ce Driver User Manual Chapter 4 Ko Parameters Summary Chapter 10 Parameters Summary 10 1 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Site Page General Tab BTS Number Integer 0 999999 0 a different value must be configured BTS Name String up to 32 characters null empty string BTS Location String up to 70 characters null empty string Locaton in Site and Rack String up to 32 characters null empty string Contact Person String up to 32 characters null empty string Longitude Use the format Il mmm a where Ill is fro 0 to 000 000 N Not licable if Gonfi J GPS 179 mmm is from 000 to 999 and the value of a o app ER e if Gonfigure isciherEorw Type is Trimble Latitude Use the format Ill mmm a where Ill is fro 0 to 000 000 E Not licable if Gonfi ups 89 mmm is from 000 to 999 and the value of a 0 app ES e if Gonfigure is either N or SI Type is Trimble Altitude 300 0 to 9000 0 0 Not applicable if Gonfigured GPS Type is Trimble Configured ASN Topology E Distributed ASN GW E Centralized ASN GW Distributed ASN GW Site Page Dry Contact Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Input Alarm Name for Input Number Il Commercial Power Failure External Eq
155. ce Flow Media Flow Type Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The media type provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule A string of 1 to 30 characters A value of ANY indicates that this parameter will be ignored Outer DSCP Marking The Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value to be used for marking the packets if the packet complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from 0 to 63 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic that complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from 0 to 7 Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable 4 4 2 4 SFA Page The SFA page comprises the following tabs E SFA Config Tab E PHS Rules Tab E Classification Config Tab E Classification Rule Protocol Tab E Classification Rule Source Address Tab HM Classification Rule Destination Address Tab HM Classification Rule Source Port Tab E Classification Rule Destination Port Tab HM Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 4 1 SFA Config Tab GE d L asnow i D am L Stevie Group 3 Qos Marking mma 1 eg Q SE SFA Config Classification Contig C Enable pp Support Tiles Zsa i J Figure 4 8 The AS
156. centile noise alarm will be generated The range is from 135 to 100 dBm Best Effort The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all Best Effort services which when exceeded triggers a Best Effort service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil RT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all RT VR services which when exceeded triggers an RT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil NRT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all NRT VR services which when exceeded triggers an NRT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil UGS The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all UGS services which when exceeded triggers a UGS service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil ERT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all ERT VR services which when exceeded triggers an ERT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 2 6 Handover Negotiation at TBS Tab GE Ses Radio Basic 1 Connectivity Basie C Connectivity Advanced L Serves Ranging Feedback Atoc
157. cies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz To delete a BS To delete a BS right click the required BS entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation IMPORTANT An associated BS specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector Page on page 263 To delete a BS from its neighbors To delete a BS from its neighbors without deleting it entirely right click the BS entry in the navigation tree and select Delete from neighboring Radio Node The Radio node includes the following pages E Radio Basic Page E Radio Advanced Page Radio Basic Page The Radio node s Basic page includes the following tabs M Radio Basic Page General Tab E Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab E Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab M Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW B Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 10 2 1 1 Radio Basic Page General Tab The General T
158. cludes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Rule 1 16383 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Marking Rule Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the Marking Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Rule 1 16383 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Marking Rule Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the Marking Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Service Flow Data Delivery Type The Service Flow Type for data delivery services uGS BE eRTVR or ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority The priority of Service Flow traffic 0 7 or ANY Service Flow Media Flow Type The Service Flow Media Flow Type as defined in ASN GW or AAA server Enable Service Flow Media Flow Type Indicates whether the condition for Service Flow Media Flow Type is enabled or disabled If enabled the Service Flow Media Flow Type will be considered
159. creating an off line file All BSs table entries related to neighbors Neighbors List Neighbors Triggers ID IP Mapping are deleted The Exclude IP Address table is also deleted After loading the Duplicate Site configuration file to the new site the user should 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard oe as configure them using online configuration and perform the required network update actions In the different wizard screen only parameters that are needed for the creation of a new Duplicate Site configuration file are displayed E Read only values of the new site are presented on a light grey background E Read only reference values of the source site e g source site BS IDs are presented as grayed out on a light grey background E Mandatory fields into which the user has to enter a new value have a yellow background E Non mandatory fields into which the user does not have to enter a new value have a white background The user may leave them as are with the default value which is an empty string in some of the cases After completing configuration of parameters in each step click Next to move to the next screen In case of consistency check failure the failed field s are marked with a red surrounding rectangle A consistency failure messages is presented on the upper side of the screen using scrolling if necessary
160. ction Rude Pa ameters Seuren IP adress sang Source IP Mak Wem Source Port K Manman Source Port lt Destination Aiden 0 0 0 0 Destination IP Mask Minium Destination Port lt Mondmum Dezination Port Protocol Rule Action Allow EI Cafe 1 D E c eet m Dorm k Figure 6 13 ACL Page The ACL page includes the following sections E ACL Table E ACL Parameters Section 6 6 5 1 ACL Table The ACL table includes the following parameters for each ACL Parameter Description ACL Number The ACL number ACL 1 99 are Standard ACLs ACL 100 198 are Extended ACLs ACL 199 is the default extended ACL that is pre configured in the system and is not attached to any interface ACL 199 is reserved for QoS marking rules You cannot configure Allow Deny rules for ACL 199 ACL Name The name of the ACL The default name is the ACL Number 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description ACL Active State The state of the ACL Up or Down A new ACL can be created only with Active State Down Rule s parameters can be modified only if the state of the ACL is Down If ACL Applicable Interface is None its state cannot be set to Up ACL Applicable Interface The interface s to which the ACL applies None ASN GW All AU ASN GW amp All AU In Mini Centrali
161. cts eaten 188 Shs Mal Pe Vl e E 188 6 9 2 Sefvice Group PAGS EE 190 6 9 3 QoS Marking Page E 202 Se EE 204 6 9 5 ASN GW Keep Alive Page wiscccieiscsssncesersiatavens teaceavugnonnnes aseneenedieniaateeennuauanee 216 6 10 BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW eceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneees 217 6 10 1 Creating Copying Deleting a BP 218 6 10 2 Radi INGE ss vsseaiecasatea satine pence echo nakaa ace Aa ARa 222 6 10 3 Connectivity Node ces cea ees re a ee ae ei 247 6 10 4 Services Page ei cocactdanaisetntzamaeiacves antectentcnadi dae ideanatdadeceeattananlunveiaattacs tammgeniee 255 6 11 Site Sector not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW cccseeeeeeeeeeneees 263 6 11 1 Site Sector E 263 Chapter 7 The Performance Vl Sl iisinesinrsiacesanrasnaasracnimaieinieianneontas 267 7 1 The Performance Viewer ssssssunuunnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnana 269 7 2 The Counters Group Selection Section snssssnnnsnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmn 270 7 3 The Counters Selection Section scisecccciscccicccenseicccnncencsanscecanesscceasensnancenssenenensanasees 271 ZA The Graph and Controls Section cccccseeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeenseseees 273 Chapter EN EE 275 8 1 Performance Collection TaSK ssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnana 277 Bidet General E EE 278 DLA E EE 279 913 Actions TAD iesiri aae
162. d Tab 65 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Idle Mode Tab 66 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Tab 67 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Triggers Tab 69 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Ranging Tab 71 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Feedback Allocations Tab 72 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Neighbor Advertisement Tab 73 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab 74 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Management Tab 76 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Handover Negotiation at TBS Tab 78 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Trigger Setup Tab 79 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page QOS Tab 80 The BS Template Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Tab 81 The BS Template Connectivity Basic Page Authentication Tab 82 The BS Template Connectivity Advanced Page Control Traffic QoS Rules Tab 83 The BS Template Connectivity Advanced Page Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab Add E E 84 The BS Template Connectivity Advanced Page Keep alive Tab 85 The BS Template Services Page Definitions Tab 87 The BS Template Services Page Mapping Tab Add Rows to Tables Template Device Driver User Manual Figures Figure 4 42 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Managers Tab Add Rows to Tables Template E 93 Figure 4 43 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Trap Managers Tab Add
163. dated range for Center Frequency August 2009 Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation wizard Step 5 Removed Altitude Electrical Azimuth Adjustment Antenna Heading is not mandatory August 2009 File Manager Updated to reflect all GUI changes of Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 Added in Equipment File Manager SW Vesion Status In Duplicate Site File Manager Added NE updated descriptions of Site IP and Site ID August 2009 Tasks Updated to reflect all GUI changes of Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 Updated to reflect the new Task Wizard Added CLI Task Added Neighboring Task Added Multiple Configuration Task August 2009 Template Manager New feature August 2009 Parameters Summary Updated to reflect all changes of release 2 5 2 including updated ranges defaults August 2009 Supported equipment Updated manual to reflect support for Mini Centralized ASN GW October 2009 Enabling Discover Updated sections on VLAN Translation External Management Interface and Static Route Definition October 2009 AAA Page Added VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment November 2009 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Template Manager Added new options to Agent Circuit ID and Agent Remote ID Corrected Suboptions numbers November 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Legal Ri
164. e Removed GPS Adapter Required August 2009 Power Feeder Page Applicable only for Indoor BTS August 2009 Antenna Page Changed to reflect the use of the new Antenna Product Type parameter Added Information read only field updated description of Description and Number of Ports Updated ranges for Longitude and Latitude Up to a maximum of 24 antennas can be defined for an Outdoor BTS August 2009 AAA Page Updated structure Accounting Authentication UDP Port parameters removed AAA Name added August 2009 Qos Marking Page Updated range for QoS Marking Rule Name and Service Flow Media Flow Type Marking Rule Name must be unique in the device Added description of functionality of the feature August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Service Group Page Service Interface Tab Changed Tunnel MTU Size to MTU Size Updated description of Default Gayeway IP Address Added Subnet Mask Updated value range for Service Interface Name 1 30 characters Added general description of service interfaces Uodated description of Tunnel Destination IP August 2009 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Changed Client Class Identifier to Vendor Class Identifier Addedd Secondary DNS Server Added Service group deletion rule
165. e Action SourceIP Source Destination IP Destination Protocol Address Port Address Port Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 69 used for UDP 17 TFTP Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 1022 1023 UDP 17 used for software download Additional Extended ACLs are created automatically for every Service Group that is associated with a VLAN Service Interface and an enabled VLAN Service Up to 10 ACLs numbered ACL 187 to ACL 196 can be created These automatically created deleted ACLs allow Ping and DHCP traffic on the DHCP Own IP Address interface of the applicable VLAN service Table 6 3 Rules of Default VLAN Service Interfaces ACL 187 196 Rule Action SourcelIP Source Destination IP Destination Protocol Address Port Address Port Allow Any Any DHCP Own IP Afddress Any ICMP 1 defined for the applicable Service Group Allow Any Any DHCP Own IP Address 67 68 used UDP 17 defined for the for DHCP applicable Service traffic Group o IMPORTANT The default pre configured and automatically created ACLs cannot be deleted and should not be modified 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity BEL Nuniber ACL Name Act achive State ACL Applicable interfaces be E Up asaw 97 97 Up ASN GW ba EN Up ANM 106 1 u INOW 199 199 Down Nore ACL Parameti Rule Mater Rule A
166. e Ethernet ports Up or Down Operational State The operational status of the Ethernet ports Up or Down Select a port to display the Ethernet Port Editor for the selected port To eliminate the risk of unintentionally loosing management connectivity to the device the physical parameters of the Backhaul and Management ports cannot be modified read only The Ethernet Ports Editor section includes the following parameters for the port selected in the Ethernet Ports table Parameter Description Administrative State The administrative status of the port Up or Down Negotiation The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Port Speed The port speed to be used for the physical interface This parameter is configurable only if the auto negotiation feature is disabled Negotiation is set to Manual The available option are 10 100 and 1000 Mbps Duplex Mode Read only The duplex status for the interface Full Duplex or Half Duplex Encapsulation Mode Read only The encapsulation mode used for the physical interface Vian aware Bridging for the Backhaul port Transparent Bridging for the Management and Cascade ports VLAN Assigned Read only The VLAN ID assigned to the ph
167. e MS profile In HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns to the MS the IP address received in the MS profile or obtains the IP address from HA using the mobile IP DHCP Own IP address Applicable only for IP Service Groups The IP address of the DHCP server relay proxy For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 IP Address Pool From Applicable only in Server mode The first address in the address pool IP Address Pool To Applicable only in Server mode The last address in the address pool Subnet Mask Applicable only in Server mode The subnet mask to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only in Server mode IP address of Default Gateway to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In theProxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Click Next to open the next screen of the wizard 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard 5 2 6 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 4 d GP Equipment Manager x gg
168. e UL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low UL transmission Rate 4 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 1 Connectivity Basic Page The Connectivity Basic page is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The Connectivity Basic page comprises the following tabs E Bearer Tab E Authentication Tab Bearer Tab Bearer Autienticauon Figure 4 35 The BS Template Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Tab The Bearer parameters are 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway of the bearer interface of the BS Must be in the same subnet with the BS bearer IP Address MTU Size The MTU size in bytes of the bearer interface of the BS The range is 1500 9000 4 4 3 3 2 Authentication Tab GEET es C Radio Basic L Radio advanced 3 Connectivity Base Q cavity Aves SASS MRSS L Servies Bemer rieri oe L O Defa authenticator IP Address 17 Refresh v swe AAAA Figure 4 36 The BS Template Connectivity Basic Page Authentication Tab The Authentication parameters are Parameter Description Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW In Distributed ASN GW Address Topology this is typically the IP address of the NPU
169. e applicable only for L3 Rules Destination Port Number The index of the Destination Port Destination Port Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule The Classification Rule Destination Port Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Destination Port parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Destination Port Number TThe index of the Destination Port Destination Port Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule From To Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Destination Port is enabled The range of values From To of the Destination ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 Enable TCP UDP Destination ndicates whether the use of a range of Destination ports is enabled for the Port classification rule If enabled then Enable IP Protocol is set to enable Protocol can be either 6 TCP or 17 UDP 4 4 2 4 9 Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab L Gesten Rude Destination Address Clavsfication Raie Source Port Classt
170. e classification rule Specify the PHS rulename if you want to perform PHS for this flow Must be a PHS Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects Type Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The rule s type L2 or L3 4 4 2 4 4 Classification Rule Protocol Tab B 1 2 L Gw C Service Group L Qos Marking Om cl C Service Protie PHS Rules Classification Contig Classification Rule Proto L Classification Rule Source Address Classtication Ride Destination Address Clastic lt gt pad X lt p Revert Ride Number US Ride Number IP Protocol Number IP Protocol Nuriber ei IP Protocol ste P Protocol C Enable 1P Protocol L sgealt sve le Figure 4 11 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Protocol Tab The Classification Rule Protocol tab is applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The Classification Rule Protocol table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Protocol parameters are applicable only for L3 Rules IP Protocol Number The index of the IP
171. e is stored select the file and click Import The Template Editor will open allowing you to modify the Name and Description of the imported file NOTE The Import option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry Export Not available if two or more templates are selected Exports the selected template XML file to the client file system Click to open the Export window browse to the desired location on the client file system if necessary change the name to be assigned to the template file in the client file system and click Export to export the template 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Template Modes 4 2 Template Modes The Template Mode defines the principles of updating target object by a Multiple Configuration task using the template The available modes are E Add Rows to Tables This mode is used primarily to add new entries rows to various tables Note that if the specified index of a new row already exists in the target object this row instance will be ignored by the target object E Update Parameters This mode is used for updating parameters of existing tables rows If a specified row index does not exist the requested changes for this row will be ignored by the target object It is used also for updating scalar parameters E Update Multiple Rows This mode is used p
172. e managed object will be rejected After clicking OK in the row configuration window a new row with the configured values is added to the table colored green and the parameters editor for the row is displayed on the right side allowing you to configure parameters for the new object After completing configuration of the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The color of the new row will change to black As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters To delete a previously saved row select it and click on the Remove button above the table Managing Tables in Update Parameters Templates Each row in the table has one or more row identifier s To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row configuration window will open enabling you to configure the mandatory row identifier s Note that the parameters editor allows you to later modify the row identifier s of the row The irow identifier s in tables of Update Parameters templates must be defined taking into account the relevant existing row identifiers in the target objects that will participate in the Multiple Configuration task using the template A row with row identifier s that do not exist in the managed object will be rejected After clicking OK in the row configuration window a new row wi
173. e uplink median noise alarm will be generated The range is from 135 to 100 dBm Uplink 99 Percentile Noise he uplink 99 noise level represents the 99 value of the noise floor histogram f the uplink 99 noise level exceeds the value calculated as the target noise and interference level for the PUSC Zone see Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab on page 238 plus the value of the Uplink 99 Percentile Noise parameter an excessive uplink 99 percentile noise alarm will be generated The range is from 135 to 100 dBm 6 10 2 2 6 Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS tab enables defining QoS management parameters for scheduling uncommitted traffic above the maximum reserved rate Scheduling uncommitted traffic can be done using one of the following options E Equal Time ET scheduling mode in which air resources are being scheduled in a fair manner proportional to the users excess traffic maximum sustained rate maximum reserved rate SLAs E Equal Rate ER scheduling mode in which air resources are allocated to users aiming at ensuring data rate fairness between users proportional to their excess traffic SLAs Assuming a sector with diversity different channels conditions of active users ET scheme enables higher aggregate sector throughput at the expense of data rate fairness among users while ER scheduling scheme ensures maximum data rate fairness among users at the expense of lo
174. earer Local Management Administrative State The administrative state of the IP Interface Up or Down The IP Interface Editor section displays the following parameters for the interface selected in the IP Interface table Parameter Description Administrative State The administrative state of the interface Up or Down Beware from shutting down the interface you use for managing the device Description A brief description of the interface A string of up to 35 characters IP Address The IP address of the interface 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description IP Subnet MAsk The IP subnet mask of the interface MTU Size The MTU size in bytes of the interface The range is from 68 to 1500 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the interface Note that the VLAN ID of Local Managementcannot be modified The range is 11 100 110 4094 Not configurable for the Local Management Interface set to 9 x NOTE Applicablity of IP interfaces and the ability to shut down an IP interface depend on the current ASN Topology and NMS Connectivity Mode IMPORTANT The Bearer interface IP address is used also in other interfaces such as the ASN and CSN interfaces If you change the Bearer interface IP address you must reboot the NPU to apply changed IP address on these interfaces 4Motion BTS and M
175. ed ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Recommended values for First Zone Minimum Size and Maximum Size Table 6 5 First Zone Minimum Size Recommended Value Range Bandwidth First Zone Basic Map Repetition Minimum Size symbols up to a MHz Scheme maximum of Y as defined below 7 10 Full Loading No Limitation or 8 2N No Limitation or 6 2N MN A Oo No Limitation or 4 2N k No Limitation or 4 2N Reuse 1 3 N A non trivial configuration 8 2N NIAJ O 6 2N e 6 2N 5 MHz Full Loading N A non trivial configuration No Limitation or 8 2N MN AJO No Limitation or 6 2N No Limitation or 4 2N Reuse 1 3 N A non trivial configuration N A non trivial configuration N A O N A non trivial configuration 1 N A non trivial configuration First Zone Scheme is being determined by the selected Map Major Groups E For 7 10 MHz Full Loading means all Major Groups 0 5 are selected E For 5MHz Full Loading means that all relevant Major Groups 0 2 4 are selected For First Zone Maximum Size the values are E If First Zone Minimum Size is set to No Limitations the value range for Maximum Size is the same as for Minimum Size E Else the value range is No Limitations or First Zone Minimum Size 2N up to a maximum of Y as defined belo
176. ed Traffic Rate An internal R6 profile parameter specifying the minimum reserved traffic rate in Kbps Applicable only for relevant data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than Max Sustained Traffic Rate The range is 0 40000 A value of 1 indicates that the parameter is not used Use Max Sustained Traffic Rate If enabled checked the service lookup function will try to match the Service Flow Max Sustained Traffic Rate with the Max Sustained Traffic Rate entry see below If disabled the service lookup function will ignore the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate An internal R6 profile parameter specifying the maximum sustained traffic rate in Kbps Applicable only for relevant data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY The range is 0 40000 A value of 1 indicates that the parameter is not used Use Latency If enabled checked the service lookup function will try to match the Service Flow Latency with the Latency entry see below If disabled the service lookup function will ignore the Latency Latency An R6 parameter entry in the lookup table specifying the maximum tolerated latency in milliseconds Applicable only for relevant data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR The range is 0 5000 A value of 1 indicates that the parameter is not used 6 10 4 2 2 3 Map to Service Type The Map to Service Type
177. ed for enabling bearer IP domain connectivity When the Unified connectivity mode is selected the NMS server is also connected using the bearer interface The available range is 11 100 110 4094 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description External Ether Type Not applicable for a BTS operating in Centralized ASN Topology The Layer 2 Ether Type configurs the outer VLAN header of uplink Q in Q traffic The available values are 8100 88A8 9100 9200 AU Maintenance VLAN ID Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The service interface of the AU is used for uploading maintenance reports to an external server Most of the service interface parameters except the VLAN ID are configured separately for each AU see AU Card Properties Tab on page 175 The AU maintenance VLAN ID is the VLAN ID used by all AU service interfaces The available range is 1 9 11 100 110 4094 6 6 1 3 Ethernet Ports The Ethernet Ports section includes the Ethernet Ports table and the Ethernet Ports Editor section The Ethernet Ports table displays the following read only parameters for each defined port Parameter Description Port The Ethernet port name Backhaul DATA Management MGMT Cascade CSCD The CSCD port is not applicable for Outdoor BTS Administrative State The administrative status of th
178. ed to the MS SF ID The Service Flow ID Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow Direction The direction of the Service Flow Up or Down Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address The following buttons are now available Button Description Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data Home Click to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window De Register MS Click to force de registration of the MS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW SS Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of All MSs Data 3 3 Retrieval of All MSs Data The Retrieval of All MSs Data option is used to retrieve general details related to all MSs served by a specific ASN GW as maintained by the ASN GW H i cauementmanager x Gavecoverrsettngs x D aa mees x A remsso x Al tege x gf Network mantensrce x madatnan A L ae Network Maintenance Management Target aw IP Address ASN GW BTS Number O APU Management IP Address fe Hoe Apah Network Markenance server 10 10 107 117 User adan Figure 3 2 Network Maintenance Retrieval of All MSs Data You can select the serving entity by E ASN GW IP Address the Bearer interface IP address of the target device E ASN GW BTS Number the BTS Number of the target device E NPU Management IP Address the IP address of the int
179. ee Site Sector Page on page 263 it will be marked in green however it will not be operational If the ODU exists and is associated meaning that it is reachable its ports configuration 1x1 or 4x2 will be indicated on the left side Click on an associated ODU s icon to view relevant associations A blue background will be added to the selected ODU as well as to the AU ODU connectors AU channels and Site Sector associated with it Double click on any of the defined ODUs to open the specific ODU configuration page Sectors View The Sectors view shows text boxes for the defined Site Sectors The name ofa defined Sector is displayed in the relevant area Note that the name can also be an 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment 6 3 5 empty string null It is recommended to define a Sector Name for all defined sectors to provide clear distinction between site sectors Click on a Sector s text box to view relevant associations A blue background will be added to the selected Sector as well as to the ODU s and AU channel s associated with it if applicable Double click on any of the Site Sectors to open the specific site sector configuration page External Devices View The External Devices View below the Chassis View displays information related to external devices connected to the BTS In the cur
180. eeeeeeeeeenseseeseeseneeeeneseees 92 Chapter S The Duplicate Site ManaQeliisisiinssinnnariuissessnmecsscne 99 5 1 Twin Site Crea thin cesses can seecateccwtacaenseceeencnceneaneneseacensesnetceansceanptuecnesmnaccerentemnunce 101 5 2 The Twin Slte Creation WZa0G aiscsciescccsnntesececsscctcsesstncesnssantenestnececaevssstedecesvancanasences 103 SC MAU O CUE TOM srren a naa a a aao a 103 5 2 2 Starting the Twin Site Creation Wizard AE 104 5 2 3 Twin Site Creation Wizard Gren 106 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Contents 5 2 4 Twin Site Creation Wizard Gren 107 5 2 5 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 8 isiscisiccsctstecsencnssuconseuesnntessteenentvenveeoeavennes 109 5 2 6 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 4 cccesscceeeessseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeessaeeeseenenees 112 5 2 7 Twin Site Creation Wizard Grepb ANEN 114 Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ices ica sa rach seisceidieetinrisciersaciaeces 116 6 1 Using the Device Manager ssssssssnennunnnrunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 118 6 1 1 Introduction to the Device Manager ccscicssiccsstiessonretceiecdietieis scene 118 6 1 2 The Device Manager Components cccccceeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeees 119 6 1 3 Common Control ung ege egdeeen ar sebge ebeeNegeeegER SCENE EENS 120 6 1 4 Working with Configuration Tables AAA 120 6 2 Introduction to Device Management 0 ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeee
181. efined as a Trap Manager 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Management Page The SNMP Trap Managers table includes the following fields for each authorized SNMP Trap Manager Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the Trap Manager Must be unique in the network the same IP address cannot be assigned to more than one Trap Manager I Port Number The port number on which the Trap Manager will listen for messages from the Agent The range is from 1 to 65535 The port on which the management system listens for traps is 162 Community The name of the SNMP Read Community used by the Trap Manager Traps are sent toward those Managers for which this parameter is configured A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive Enable Site Traps Indicates whether the sending of traps to the management station is enabled or disabled The SNMP Trap Managers section also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Manager Adds a new entry to the SNMP Trap Managers table Delete Deletes one or several selected entries from the SNMP Trap Managers table 6 7 2 Performance Tab The Performance tab allows enabling disabling collection and storage of performance data For details on collection and storage of counters supported counters groups and the counters in each group refer to the Perfo
182. eighboring tasks initiated from a single source BS see Neighbor List on page 233 gt To open the Mass Neighboring Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard and select the Neighboring Task option E To open an existing task select an existing Mass Neighboring task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Mass Neighboring Task Editor for the selected task is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Mass Neighboring Task iva X Mass Neighboring Task Name neighboring 1 Select All C Selected BSs BS Neighbor ID BTS Number Oo kel Kei Tl leon Figure 8 10 Mass Neighboring Task Editor The Mass Monitoring Task editor comprises the following fields Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters Task Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task A string of 0 to 128 characters Select All Select to include all BSs in the Neighboring BSs list in the task The neighboring BSs list includes all BSs that are defined as neighbors of other BSs or as having at least one neighbor The Selected BSs table includes the following detail
183. el for CQI 8 to Required C N Level for CQI 7 see CQI parameter above 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 74 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description QPSK 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CDMA 16 to Required C N Level for CDMA 14 see CDMA parameter above QPSK 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 14 see QPSK 1 2 parameter above 16 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for transmitting 16 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 7 see QPSK 3 4 parameter above 16 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 16 QAM 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 14 see 16 QAM 1 2 parameter above 64 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes
184. elow or far below the average instantaneous rate within sector A dynamic protection mechanism is implemented in which the mechanism of limiting resource allocations is automatically and dynamically activated when needed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Advanced 0 0 2 0 12 148 Feedback Diversty Power Control Mobility Management QoS Scheduler Schoder Mode Equi Rate Iv Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level None ei Scheduler Lt Abuse Protection Level None Wl 1 Betresh wi r J Figure 6 53 Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Scheduler Mode The basis for allocating excess bandwidth among relevant users E Equal Rate Throughput Fairness E Equal Time Resource Fairness The selected mode is applicable for both uplink and downlink schedulers Scheduler DL Abuse Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate Protection Level None No Protection Low Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with very low DL transmission Rate Medium Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low DL transmission Rate 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized
185. em startup procedures Fault Fault management procedures SW Version Software upgrade procedures Connectivity Connectivity procedures ASN GW ASN GW procedures applicable only in Distributed ASN GW mode Internal AU Manager Internal processes used for managing the AUs not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment 6 8 6 8 1 Equipment The Equipment node includes two sub nodes E Shelf E External not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Shelf The Shelf sub node enables access to the following pages E Power Supply Page applicable only for Indoor BTS E NPU Page E AU Node with AU Slot Page not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW for each of the existing created AU entities In addition from the navigation tree of a managed BTS you can create new AU entities or delete an existing AU entity refer to Section 6 8 1 3 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment 6 8 1 1 Power Supply Page applicable only for Indoor BTS The Power Supply page enables viewing defining the properties of required PIU and PSU cards and viewing the properties of installed cards W te on 10 10 144 201 Configuring E Oe Power Supply ae ao gt Betrest e Anc Dore Figure
186. emplate Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Enable Keep Alive This parameter enable disable the ASN GW keep alive mechanism The following parameters are applicable only if Keep Alive is enabled Polling Period The period In seconds between polling sessions The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds Polling Period x 1000 value in milliseconds cannot be lower than Retransmission Timeout x Number of Retransmissions 1 Number of Retransmissions Maximum number of retries if Retransmission Timeout has expired without getting a response The range is from 1 to 10 Retransmission Timeout Time in milliseconds to wait for a response before initiating another polling attempt or reaching a decision that the polled entity has failed if the maximum number of retries set by Number of Retransmissions has been reached The range is from 5000 to 10000 milliseconds 5 to 10 second 4 4 3 BS Template The BS Template comprises the following pages E Radio Basic Page E Radio Advanced Page HM Connectivity Basic Page E Connectivity Advanced Page E Services Page 4 4 3 1 Radio Basic Page The Radio Basic page comprises the following tabs E General Def Tab E RF Tab E Base Band Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor E Idle Mode Tab E Air
187. eneral tab defines the general airframe parameters E gema Dist MHIPIP on 10 10 161 130 Cor Basic 0 0 2 0 12 148 General Ga Trane soude eer Ae Frame Structure Zones Mobilty Cell tb 3 Preantle Grouu 1 Segment Number v Preamble Inde Frame Number Offset 1 Total Upink Duration 6 Te cit Betrasty o aeey Dorm Figure 6 44 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab The Air Frame Structure General tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map Major Groups see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab on page 226 used for the FDC transmission Preamble Index Read only The Preamble Index used by the BS 0 113 Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The range is from 0 to 15 4Motion BTS and Mini Central
188. ent Information is enabled Indicates whether RADIUS Attributes Sub option 7 82 is enabled or disabled Service Type Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Indicates whether Service Type attribute 6 is enabled or disabled Vendor Specific Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Indicates whether Vendor Specific attribute 26 is enabled or disabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Session Timeout Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Indicates whether Session Timeout attribute 27 is enabled or disabled Service VLAN Applicable only for IP Service Groups with an attached VLAN service interface Indicates the status of a VLAN service interface attached to the service group Not applicable when the attached Service Interface is IP in IP If a Service Group with Service VLAN enabled is attached to a Service Profile Service VLAN cannot be disabled Vendor Class Identifier Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The option 60 string Up to 30 characters An empty string null means that DHCP Option 60 is disabled
189. ent Tab The Template Configuration Editor C Primary Server IP address L Radars Shared Secrat T Figure 4 3 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Client Tab The AAA Client parameters are Parameter Description Primary Server IP Address The IPv4 address of the AAA server RADIUS Shared Secret The shared secret between the authenticator function and the AAA server A string of 1 to 49 characters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 1 2 AAA Access Tab B 2 2 Le ASN GW ana L Service Group 1 Qos Marking am al R oo AAA Cent AAA Access keep em FA C ar time Zone offset 3 bk Figure 4 4 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Access Tab The AAA Access parameter is Parameter Description GMT Time Zone Offset The time zone offset in seconds from GMT at the NAS The range is from 0 to 86400 seconds 4 4 2 2 Service Group Page The Service Group page comprises the following tabs M Service Interfaces Tab E Service Groups Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 2 1 Service Interfaces Tab Birem peee aia ES 1 Qos Marking Fa C Service Profie bou
190. ent for which the template is prepared Can be configured only for a new template MO Type The type of Managed Object ASN GW BS or Management for which the template is applicable Can be configured only for a new template SW Version The SW Version used for preparing the template Can be configured only for a new template Template Mode The mode of configuration changes that will take place when a Multiple Configuration task uses the template to modify configuration of devices Refer to Template Modes on page 28 Can be configured only for a new template Owner Read only The user that created the template Creation Date Read only The date and time of template s creation 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 The Template Configuration Editor The Template Configuration Editor enables viewing modifying the parameters included in the selected template There are two types of parameters Scalars a single instance in each managed object and tables that may contain multiple rows multiple instances of the relevant parameters in each managed object Refer to Managing Tables for general guidelines on managing table rows The template s content may vary in accordance with the specified template attributes NE Type MO Type and SW Version In the current release there are two types of template
191. entralized ASN GW 226 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Minimum Size The initial size in symbols of the first zone When reuse 3 is used within first zone this parameter should be equal across all BSs within deployment The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation See limitations in First Zone Minimum Size Recommended Value Range table below Other values should be avoided Maximum Size Maximum size in symbols for first zone Used mainly for performance control capability within frame The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation Maximum Size cannot be lower than Minimum Size Maximum Map Size Limits the maximum size of maps in slots The available options are 10 20 300 10xN where N 1 30 or No Limitation Map Major Groups The major groups allocated to the BS for maps transmission as indicated by the selection of the corresponding checkboxes If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant grayed out If Segment Number see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab on page 225 is 0 then bit 0 should be set checked If Segment Number is 1 then bit 2 should be set checked If Segment Number is 2 then bit 4 should be set checked Basic Map Repetition The basic repetition used in the transmissi
192. equired HW Version E 58Amp 58Amp E 35Amp PSU Card Properties Slot 1 4 Required E Yes Yes E No NPU Page 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Shutdown Operation E No Action No Action E Shutdown E Reset E Reset to Factory Daily Backup Time hh mm 00 00 Create New AU Type AU 4x4 Modem AU 4x4 Modem AU Number if ctreated from navigation tree Available AU Slot nubers First available AU Slot number AU Page Properties Tab Required Type AU 4x4 Modem AU 4x4 Modem IP Address IP address 192 168 0 1 Mask Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Next Hop IP address 0 0 0 0 none AU Slot Page Control Tab Shutdown Operation E Normal Operation E Reset D Shutdown Normal Operation Shutdown Power AU to ODU per port E Shutdown Ports 1 4 E No Shutdown Ports 1 4 No Shutdown all ports Create New ODU ODU type A list of ODU types ODU Number Available ODU nubers First available ODU number ODU Page General Required ODU Type E Alist of ODU types N A External Cavity Filter Existence True False check box False Ports Configuration 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary
193. er in Trigger Setup parameters to Averaging Duration with updated description removed all other Trigger Setup parameters Changed Neighbor Advertisement to Neighbor Advertisement Broadcast Changed the name of Periodic Interval to Interval Removed all other Neighbor Advertisement parameters Radio Advanced Page Scanning Removed August 2009 Tab Radio Advanced Page Removed general Downlink Dropped Packets August 2009 Management Tab Ratio parameter Added new parameters for Alarm Threshold for Downlink Dropped Packet Ratio per service type Added new parameters for Alarm Thresholds for noise and interference level Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab New feature August 2009 Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Addedd VLAN ID read only August 2009 Tab Updated descriptions of IP Address and Default Gateway 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Connectivity Advanced Page QoS Marking Rules Tab New Name was Bearer Plane Updated range for Service Flow Data Delivery Type August 2009 Connectivity Advanced Page Keep Alive Tab New feature August 2009 Connectivity Advanced Page ID IP Mapping Tab Moved from Connectivity Basic Page to Connectivity Advanced Page August 2009 Services Page Definition Tab Changed the name was previously Service Definition Changed the structure Added p
194. erface used for managing the site NPU to which the ASN GW is assigned Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option Click Apply to retrieve the data for all MSs served by the specified ASN GW The displayed data for all MSs served by the specified entity includes 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of All MSs Data Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Data per MS served by the target device MS ID the MS ID MAC address Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS The following buttons are now available Button Description Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data Home Click to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window Export List to CSV Click to open the Select Export Destination File allowing you to export the All MSs Data to a CSV file in a selectable location De Register All MSs Click to force de registration of all MSs served by the selected device Retrieve Selected MS Full Data Select an entry in the MS Data table and click to retrieve from the ASN GW full details for the selected MS See below the displayed details The dis
195. erver Type IP Service Interface Name DHCP Function Mode ka lt lt lt Lease Time 86 400 DHCP Own IP Address MS MS Loop Back Disable lt Enable Service VLAN Accounting Accounting Mode Time based lt Interim Interval H 3 rnin DHCP Function Addresses Configuration Address Allocation Timeout Add Service Group Delete Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Renewal Time 50 of Lease Time Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Rebind Time ell of Lease Time IP Address Pool From 50 50 50 1 Offer Reuse Time 5 9 9 v E L psen van Figure 6 29 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Upper Section Server Proxy Mode 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Service Group wem Looe wack Dee Lei Loge service VLAN Accounting Hode Tnenrimn Interval H 3 rron b sse Desie DHCP Function Adete Configuration Address Allocstion Iren Nets pao Mad Tae ai toa te Secondary ONS Server 0 0 0 0 Retard Tan 75 9 to of Lease Tree WaddossPook ben sensi O Offer rare Tma C Jaa te oao _ Exchaded IP Aches 0 0 0 0 aw Manager Server Exekidod IP addressees List Server Hai Moran ses A Chert Boot File rane e Yet hn i Wad tunay Padane TOE Cs oi L t ve Dos KH Figure 6 30 Service Group Page Se
196. es using a pre prepared template For details on templates and how they are used to modify configuration of target objects refer to The Template Manager on page 23 x NOTE In the current release the template based Multiple Configuration task supports multiple configuration of BTS devices It does not support multiple configuration of Mini Centralized ASN GW devices gt To open the Multiple Configuration Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard and select the Multiple Configuration Template Based option E To open an existing task select an existing Multiple Configuration task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Multiple Configuration Task Editor for the selected task is displayed To open a new task from the Equipment Manager select the target device s right click and select the Multiple Configuration option 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Multiple Configuration Template Based Task Multiple Configuration Task Name Description SS Equpment Template ek Equipment Selector ae Add L x Remove LO kE LO sg kd fever RS ecco Figure 8 11 Multiple Configuration Task Editor The M
197. et D frames Trall kie perad xO rs Dowrink Base Rate PSE LD Repetition Adverned Gerten GO Gan Ms Iniiated Ida Mode Fur UGS illo ch Betrasty e Annie Done i Figure 6 59 Services Page Definitions Tab The Services table displays the following read only parameters for each existing Service Parameter Description Service Name The name of the service Maximum DL The maximal number of downlink retransmissions of an HARQ sub burst for this Retransmissions service 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Parameter Description Maximum UL The maximal number of uplink retransmissions of an HARQ sub burst for this Retransmissions service Select an entry to open the Editor for the selected service The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Service Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Editor allowing to configure parameters for the new service The Service Name is a mandatory parameter If you type a Service Name and click Apply the new service will be created with default values Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table The Service Parameters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Name The name of the service 1 to 32 characters The name of an existing service cannot be modified
198. eter Description User The user name for the CLI script Must be a user that is defined in the target device s The default user is admin Password The password for the CLI script Must be the password associated with the defined user in the target device s The default password is admin123 The Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Name The name of the site as configured in the device IP Address The IP address of the device Location The Location associated with the device in the management system Click Add to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Equipment table Click Remove to remove one or several selected devices from the table In the CLI Script text box enter the CLI script to be executed on the target device s You can use the Browse button to import a pre prepared script that may be edited after being imported to the task 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gr Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Mass Neighboring Task 8 7 Mass Neighboring Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Mass Neighboring Task is applicable only to the BSs of the managed BTS The Mass Neighboring task enables executing Send Update to All Neighbors and Get Update tasks on multiple BSs to ensure that the required neighbor BS data in all target BSs is fully updated This task complements the one time N
199. ettings section comprises the following action options when AU Software Upgrade is selected Parameter Description Download to Shadow Loads the upgrade file selected in the File Name selection field below to the Shadow memory of the applicable AU s The file is loaded first to the applicable NPU s and then to the AU s If the file already exists in the NPU the first stage is skipped If it exists in the AU the process will be skipped Note that the NPU can store a maximum of 3 AU SW files A new SW file cannot be loaded to the NPU if it has already 3 AU SW files unless one of the SW files is not in use by any AU in which case it will be replaced by the new AU SW file You may need to first delete at least one AU SW file from the NPU see Delete AU Version from NPU below before executing the Download to Shadow task Switch over The AU s reset and boot from the shadow file If successful the files are switched automatically and the new is set as the Operational file 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 202 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Parameter Description Delete AU version from NPU If selected deletes the selected software upgrade file from the selected equipment Note that you can remove only one file at a time Note also that the file to be deleted must be available also in the default TFTP server Applicable only if the selected option
200. evel E Low E Medium Scheduler UL Abuse Protection E None None Level E Low E Medium BS Connectivity Node Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Tab IP Address Valid IP address N A IP Subnet Mask Valid IP subnet mask N A Default Gateway Valid IP address N A MTU Size 1500 9000 1500 Connectivity Basic Page Authentication Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Default Authenticator IP Address Valid IPv4 address N A Authentication Thresholds Suspended EAP Process 0 10000 10000 Active MSs 0 1024 1024 Maximum EAP Rounds 0 100 100 Connectivity Advanced Page ID IP Mapping Tab Network Node ID X X X x 0 255 null Network Node IP Address Valid IP address null Connectivity Advanced Page QoS Marking Rules Tab QoS Rule Parameters Marking Rule Name String up to 32 characters null Rule Status E Enable Enable E Disable Condition Service Flow Data Delivery Type E uGS ANY E TVR E nRTVR E bE E eRTVR E ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority 0 7 or ANY ANY Enable Service Flow Media Flow E Enable Disable check box Disable Type Service Flow Media Flow Type String up to 32 characters null Action Outer DSCP Marking 0 63 0 802 1p Priority Marking 0 7 0 Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules Diffserv Code Point 0 63 0 802 1p Priority 0 7
201. file descriptor is disabled unauthenticated mode Up to 63 additional Service Profiles may be created The Service Profile node enables creating new service profiles opening the Service Profile page for one of the existing service profiles and deleting a service profile 6 9 4 3 1 Creating Deleting a Service Profile gt To create a new service profile 1 Right click the Service Profile sub node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New Service Profile window Service Profile Service Profile Name Service Profile Enable Disable v ES Figure 6 38 New Service Profile Window 2 In the New Service Profile window define the Service Profile Name 1 30 characters and click Apply The new service profile will be added to the list of service profiles available under the Service Profile sub node with the default status of Disable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW o Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 3 To configure the parameters of the new service profile click on the service profile name in the navigation tree to open the Service Profile page for this service profile Up to a maximum of 64 service profiles can be created gt To delete a Service Profile To delete a service profile right click the required service profile entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation Note that the Defaul
202. for which translation values have been defined and the applicable translation values Parameter Description VLAN ID The original VLAN ID for which translation is required Must be a VLAN ID that is allowed on the port Change To The translated VLAN ID the VLAN ID used in the backbaul network that is mapped to the original VLAN ID The range is 11 4094 The following buttons are available below the table Parameter Description Add VLAN ID Adds a new entry to the table allowing you to configure irs parameters Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table 6 6 2 IP Interface Page The IP Interface page enables viewing modifying IP connectivity for IP interface 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Leon K on 10 20 144 201 Configuring Ec p 5 ES e cl d gt IP Interface IP Interface rietse Administrative State Adhinistyative Rate Rc Nad sternal Magie Ur Dewmgpen LIPVLAN Interface Acal Management u O Bisi w ay Dure Figure 6 10 IP Interface Page The IP Interface page includes the IP Interface table and the IP Interface Editor section The IP Interface table displays the following read only parameters for each IP interface Parameter Description IP Interface The name of the IP interface External Management B
203. g a Single Device on page 116 NOTE You can also open the Device Manager by double clicking on the selected device Edit Opens the Equipment Editor for the selected equipment object s allowing to edit general information You can edit only the Location and Contact of multiple selected devices You cannot change the IP address of a device For more details see The Equipment Editor on page 11 Delete Deletes the selected equipment object s from the database The application prompts you for confirmation You can always rediscover deleted equipment License Activated only when unlicensed equipment is selected If the number of devices of a certain type in the database has reached the number of available licenses for managing the specific device type additional devices of this type will be presented as unlicensed These devices cannot be managed by the system Click on the License option to open the License Manager enabling to view the current status of available licenses and install additional licenses if necessary Cut Through Opens a Telnet session to the selected device Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the State of the selected device is other than Up Open Map Opens the location map displaying the selected map for the applicable location Available only when a location Region is assigned to the selected device Not available if two or more devices are selected Perfo
204. ge duration for triggers in frames The range is from 1 to 255 frames 6 10 2 2 4 3 Neighbor Advertisement Broadcast The Neighbor Advertisement Broadcast section includes the following parameter Parameter Description Interval The periodic NBRADV transmission interval in seconds The range is from 0 to 100 in steps of 0 1 6 10 2 2 5 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab The Management tab enables defining alarm threshold parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW GR 4 Advanced 0 0 2 0 12 148 Feedback Deversky Power Control Moblity Management Qc Alarm Thresholds for Qewnlirk Cropped Packnts Ratio Best Effort E wu E D C wwo w NAT VR 1000 UGS mu ee ERT WR 1000 Ta Alarm Thresholds for Neise and interference Level Uplink Median Noise BE dum Uplink 99 Percentile Nose 7 WC d nn elle Betresh e Ai Dore Figure 6 52 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab The Management tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Alarm Thresholds for Downlink Dropped Packets Ratio Best Effort The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all Best Effort services which when exceeded triggers a Best Effort service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil
205. ghest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 Enable TCP UDP Source Indicates whether the use of a range of source ports is enabled for the Port classification rule If enabled then Enable IP Protocol is set to enable Protocol can be either 6 TCP or 17 UDP 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 4 8 Classification Rule Destination Port Tab Brem k L Aow C Service Group L Qos Marking fE De C Service Protie Classification Ride Destination Address Classfication Rude Source Port Classification Ride Destination Port L Classification Rube Customer VLAN ID D ad X CP Revert Rude Number WE Rude Number Destination Port Maer Destination Port Number d e Destination Port Number d O From a Oro 9 Enable TCP UDP Destination Port L sgeal ze J Figure 4 15 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Port Tab The Classification Rule Destination Port tab is applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The Classification Rule Destination Port table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Destination Port parameters ar
206. ghts Legal Rights Copyright 2009 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warrant Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeLINK BreezeMAX BreezeLITE BreezePHONE 4Motion BreezeCONFIG MGW eMGW and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners WiMAX Forum is a registered trademark of the WiMAX Forum WiMAX the WiMAX Forum logo WiMAX Forum Certified and the WiMAX Forum Certified logo are trademarks of the WiMAX Forum Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warran
207. graph for each accumulating counter displays the counter rate defined as Current Value Previous Value Polling Interval seconds For gauges such as the NPU CPU usage ratio the absolute value is displayed For details on supported counters groups and the counters in each group refer to the Performance Monitoring document gt To open the Performance Viewer 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Viewer The Counters Group Selection Section 7 2 In the Equipment Manager select one device whose state is Up and click on the Performance button or right click on the entry and select the Performance option in the pop up window The Performance Viewer for the selected device will open The Performance viewer include three sections the counter group selection section the counters selection section and the graph and control buttons section For convenient viewing of the required information you can change the relative sizes of the two sections by dragging the line separating them P r r emm read 3 NPU Backhaul Port amp Connectivity Ga AU Pot I NPUBackhoul Port L NPU Management Port NPU Cascade Port Name vs Scale Pen 3 NPU Internal Managemen C PE_LAB PM Monitoring 3 NPU External Managemen NPU Backhaud Port O Postive Only 3 NPU Local Management H NPU Bckh Portin Ucast Pkt M o 10 C NPU Bearer I
208. gurable only if Configured GPS Type see GPS Page on page 182 is None If Configured GPS Type is Trimble the longitude is read only displaying the value calculated by the GPS receiver The format is Wl mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Latitude The latitude of the site Configurable only if Configured GPS Type see GPS Page on page 182 is None If Configured GPS Type is Trimble the latitude is read only displaying the value calculated by the GPS receiver The format is Il mmm a ll is latitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is N north or S south Altitude The altitude in meters of the site Configurable only if Configured GPS Type see GPS Page on page 182 is None If Configured GPS Type is Trimble the Altitude is read only displaying the value calculated by the GPS receiver The Altidude is in meters from 300 0 to 9000 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page 6 5 1 3 ASN Topology not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The ASN Topology section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Current Indicates whether the current ASN topology is based on a Distributed ASN GW or a Centralized ASN GW Configured Enables to change the current ASN
209. gured SNMP Communities or a pair of SNMP Communities A maximum of five SNMP Managers can be configured If the maximum number is reached the Add Manager button becomes inactive The SNMP Managers table includes the following fields for each authorized SNMP Manager Parameter Description Manager Number The index number of the SNMP Manager Read Community The SNMP Read Community string allowing execution of SNMP Get operations A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive Write Community The SNMP Write Community string allowing execution of SNMP Set and Get operations A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive The SNMP Managers section also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Manager Adds a new entry to the SNMP Managers table Delete Deletes one or several selected entries from the SNMP Managers table x 6 7 1 2 NOTE The Read and Write Communities are mandatory and both must be defined other than null Duplication of Communities pairs is not allowed each pair must be unique IMPORTANT If you delete all SNMP Managers you will loose the ability to manage the site using SNMP SNMP Trap Managers A maximum of five SNMP Trap Managers can be configured If the maximum number is reached the Add Manager button becomes inactive IMPORTANT For proper management of the site such as getting notifications on configuration change events the network management server must be d
210. h Tower Height m Used only for information inventory purposes The height of the antenna above the ground in meters The range is from 0 to 500 Mechanical Down Tilt deg Used only for information inventory purposes The downwards mechanical tilt of the antenna in degrees as opposed to the electrical tilt already integrated in the antenna and thus taken as reference instead of the horizontal plane The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Electrical Down Tilt deg Used only for information inventory purposes The downwards electrical tilt of the antenna in degrees The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Cable Loss dB Used only for information inventory purposes The attenuation in dB of the cable between the ODU port and antenna port The range is from 0 to 20 in 0 1 dB steps Click Finish to finish the wizard The newly created Duplicate Site configuration file is now available in the File Manager The first screen of the wizard is displayed allowing creation of another Duplicate Site configuration file 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter O E Managing a Single Device Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device x NOTE This Chapter describes the Device Manager for the BTS equipment Indoor and Outdoor and for the Mini Centralized ASN GW Appropriate note will indicate pages or parameters that are appli
211. hanged to a unique value R6 Profile Data Delivery Scheduling Type E UGS ANY E RT VR E NRT VR E BE E ERT VR E ANY Priority E ANY ANY E 0 7 Use Media Flow Type E Enable Disable check box E Disable Media Flow Type String up to 32 characters Blank string Use Min Reserved Traffic Rate E Enable Disable check box Disable Min Reserved Traffic Rate E i any 1 D 0 40000 Use Max Sustained Traffic Rate E Enable Disable check box Disable Max Sustained Traffic Rate E i any 1 D 0 40000 Use Latency Enable Disable check box Disable Latency E 1 any 1 E 0 5000 Map to Service Type Service Name Available Service Names SampleData Map to R1 Profile Modify Service QoS Parameters E Enable Disable check box Disable Default Priority 0 7 0 Priority 0 7 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Data Delivery Scheduling Type E UGS UGS D RT VR D NRT VR E DE D ERT VR Min Reserved Traffic Rate D 0 40000 0 Max Sustained Traffic Rate D 0 40000 0 Latency 0 5000 0 Jitter 0 5000 0 Grant Interval 0 5000 0 Create New Sector Set Sector Number The available Site Sectors The first available Site Sector Site Sector Page Site Sector Definition Name String up to 32 characters null Heading 0 359 0 The heading of an as
212. he CLI Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard and select the CLI option E To open an existing task select an existing CLI task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the CLI Task Editor for the selected task is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks CLI Task CLI Task General CLI Protocol Description Port Equipment 10 10 144 201 CLI Script 20 5 i xe Figure 8 9 CLI Task Editor The CLI Task editor comprises the following fields General Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task A string of 0 to 128 characters NE Type Enables selection of the type of target Network Elements that will participate in the task CLI Protocol Protocol Enables selection of the protocol to be used Telnet or SSH The default is Telnet Port Displays the default port to be used For Telnet the default is 23 For SSH the default is 22 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks CLI Task Param
213. he HCO8 controlling card connected to this port CPLD SW Version The software version of the CPLD controlling card connected to this port Serial Number The serial number of the ODU card connected to this port 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ei Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment 6 8 2 3 GPS Page The GPS page enables defining the GPS receiver configuration and time synchronization settings Configured GPS Type None ly Navigation Process Signal Processor SW Version Warm Start Synchronmation Number of Satelites Acqured Cl 1 Betresh we Gap Dore Figure 6 24 GPS Page The GPS page includes the following parameters Parameter Description GPS Receiver Configuration Configured GPS Type The type of GPS to be connected to the BTS The currently available options are Trimble or None Navigation Processor SW Read only The software version of the navigation processor of the GPS Version receiver Signal Processor SW Version Read only The software version of the signal processor of the GPS receiver Warm Start Almanac Usable Time The maximum period in hours for which the Almanac time is valid when the GPS is reset The range is from 0 to 4320 Hot Start Ephemeris Usable Time The maximum period in hours for which the Ephemeris time is valid when the GPS is reset The range is from 0 to 168
214. he following sections E Time And Date eer KH E Synchronization not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page 6 5 3 1 Time And Date The Time and Date section includes the following parameters Parameter Description UTC Time and Date The UTC Coordinated Universal Time date and time In BTS equipment configurable only if the Configured GPS Type is set to None see GPS Page on page 182 The format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy hh between 0 and 23 mm between 0 and 59 ss between 0 and 59 dd mm with usual date and month rules yyyy between 2006 to 9999 Local Time Zone The offset of the local time from the UTC The range is 12 00 to 13 00 in 30 minutes resolution Daylight Saving Time This parameter defines the amount of time by which the clock should be advanced during the daylight saving period The available values are 0 daylight saving disabled 1 and 2 hours Local Time and Date A read only display of the local date and time using 24 hour clock as calculated using the data UTC time from the GPS receiver and taking into account the Local Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time parameters The format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy For example 13 04 23 12 07 2006 Read GPS Time Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The interval after which the
215. ication Ride Destination Port Classification Rule Customer VANID K gt LS ere d Se GE 2 CS LSZ add x gt Revert Ruir Number 3 Rue Number a Gates VLA ID Hh E as Customer VLAN ID Number E aeres Ev sve a Figure 4 16 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab The Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID tab is applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Destination Port parameter is applicable only for L2 Rules Customer VLAN ID Number The index of the Customer VLAN ID Customer VLAN ID Number is always 1 a single entry for each Classification Rule The Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Classification Rule 1 100 Must be a Classification Rule Number that already exists in the target managed objects Classification Rule Destination Port parameter is applicable only for L2 Rules Customer VLAN ID
216. ice Interface cannot be deleted if the Enable Service VLAN is set to enable The Service Group Parameters Editor section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name alias of the service group A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Configurable only when creating a new Service Group Type The Service Group s type IP VPWS QinQ VPWS Transparent VPWS Mapped Configurable only when creating a new Service Group 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Service Interface Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups The pre defined service interface alias used as the data path for traffic towards the core network Configurable only when creating a new Service Group Note that a Service Interface can be associated only to a single Service Group DHCP Function Mode Applicable only for IP Service Groups The DHCP function mode E Server The ASN GW function as a DHCP server that allocates an IP address to the MS from the local pool in the non HA mode E Relay The IP address is obtained using an external DHCP server in the non HA mode E Proxy Non HA mode In Non HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns the MS the IP address that was received from AAA in the MS profile In HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns to the MS the IP address received in the MS profile or obtains the
217. ice flows can be defined only for the Default Service Profile Media Flow Type The type of media carried by the service flow An optional string of up to 32 characters Uplink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY Uplink Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kops for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY Uplink Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 Not applicable for UGS data delivery type Downlink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for downlink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY Downlink Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kops for downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY Downlink Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 Not applicable for UGS data delivery type Reference Service Group The N
218. ier cannot be deleted 6 6 4 2 By default Action IDs 1 8 are pre configured For more details refer to ACL Page on page 151 QoS Marking Classifiers QoS Marking Classifiers are used to associate Classifier IDs with Action IDs The QoS Marking Classifiers table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classifier ID The auto sequential ID number of the QoS Marking Classifier 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Action ID The action ID number associated to the classifier Must be one of the Action IDs defined in the Marking Actions table An Action ID cannot be associated to more than one classifier The QoS Marking Classifiers section also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Classifier Adds a new entry to the QoS Marking Classifiers table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the QoS Marking Classifiers table A Classifier ID referenced in an ACL Rule see ACL Parameters Section on page 156 cannot be deleted 6 6 5 By default Classifier IDs 1 8 are pre configured associated with Action IDs 1 8 respectively For more details on the default use of these classifiers refer to ACL Page on page 151 ACL Page The ACL page enables managing Access Control Lists
219. ifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty E The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute a binding offer for the sale of the product described herein 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual About This Manual About This Manual This manual describes how to use AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT Device Driver Version 2 5 for managing 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW equipment running SW Versions 2 5 NPU and AU This manual is intended for personnel responsible for managing the equipment system using the AlvariSTAR Element Management System and or the AlvariCRAFT Local CRAFT Utility It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the operation and use of AlvariSTAR AlvariCRAFT and with the operation and administration of 4Motion BTS system components and or the Mini Centralized ASN GW For more information refer to the AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT User Manual and to the relevant equipment System Manuals In this manual Network Management System refers to AlvariSTAR and Local CRAFT Utility refers to AlvariCRAFT Unless otherwise stated all features are applicable to both AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT Limitations on AlvariCRAFT due to the single device restriction are noted in a Note specific to the application as follows LOCAL CRAFT NOTE This feature is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q
220. ility to manage the unit from remote Local configuration of specific mandatory parameters using CLI is required to enable remote management of the site using the management system Refer to the Enabling Discovery on page 1 for details 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ol Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment Option Description Reset To Factory With Connectivity The system will be restarted with factory default configuration except to parameters that are required to maintain management connectivity to the unit The parameters that are maintained without any change include E Physical interfaces MGMT CSCD DATA configurations IP interfaces local management external management bearer configurations IP route configurations SNMP Managers configurations Trap Managers configurations AU software mapping not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Site ID No Action The default option no reset or shutdown operation 6 8 1 2 3 Automatic Configuration Backup The daily scheduled time for the automatic configuration backup is indicated in the Daily Backup Time text boxes in the Automatic Configuration Backup section The format is hh mm where hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 6 8 1 3 Creating Deleting an AU not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW gt To create a new AU 1 Right click the AU sub node in the navigation tree and selec
221. including the minimum severity level for which an event generates a log entry H Management Managers List Performance Losana Remote Log Server LI Enable logging to server Server 1P IT waar E Log to File E Enable logging to file Log Severky Performance ere SSCs Ratup Error ly Fou err Lei SW Version errs Cornecthty Est DEN Error lx Irternal AU Manager Error Iv Wl 17 Seel e m Core Figure 6 16 Management Page Logging Tab The Logging tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Remote Log Server Enable logging to server Indicates whether or not logging to the server is enabled If enabled the server IP address is indicated in the Server IP text box Server IP The server IP address of the server on which logs are to be maintained If logging to server is enabled the Server IP cannot be changed Log to File Enable logging to file Indicates whether or not logging to file is enabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Management Page In addition in the Logging Severity section you can disable logging to file or set the minimum severity level that generates a log entry for each of the following types of events Parameter Description Performance Performance management procedures Shelf Shelf management procedures Startup Syst
222. ini Centralized ASN GW er Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 6 6 3 IP Routing Page The IP Routing page enables viewing modifying entries in the IP Routing table It also enables adding deleting static IP routes a D 1P Routing 1P Routing Destination i Mak I Next Mop 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 22 29 10 0 0 254 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 22 247 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 100 200 100 1 295 295 255 0 0 0 0 0 172 31 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 rr el o 1 Betresh wv nn Cons Figure 6 11 IP Routing Page The IP Routing table includes the following parameters for each static route entry Parameter Description Destination The destination host or network IP address for the route Mask The net mask for the route Next Hop The next hop IP address for the route Must be in the same subnet with one of the NPU IP interfaces The IP Routing page also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Adds a new entry to the IP Routing table allowing you to configure IRS parameters Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the IP Routing table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 6 6 4 There are automatically created entries with the IP addresses of the directly connected Bearer External Management Local
223. ion or Backup Configuration System Managed Network FaukManayemert Configuration Management Servie Provisioning Admiristration Securty Managenert Heip H SB caucmere manager x D tasketanager x LA rietsen x E Template mansger x view AM BTS Fle vy Ater l g FiRefresh LO Reyon BTS Mate BTS Name Wies Set SW Version Fie Mare Fie Type Date prm 233 4M Macro BTS 10 10 14 35 2 5 2121 3 200908222055 x 4 bhp Crt Cig 2009 08 27 13 02 Normal N E Results on pages 1 Pagese 10 9 pasid i e Se Manager Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 9 1 Equipment File Manager You can use the Criteria Select Filters for viewing only files that meet one or several selection criteria The read only details of displayed files are Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system BTS Number The BTS number Site ID as configured in the device 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 The File Manager Equipment File Manager Parameter Description BTS Name The name of the BTS as configured in the device NE Type The device type Site IP The IP address of the device SW Version The running SW version used by the device when the file was created File Name The name of the file The name includes the data and time at which the file was created
224. irst zone When reuse 3 is used within first zone this parameter should be equal across all BSs within deployment The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation Maximum Size Maximum size in symbols for first zone Used mainly for performance control capability within frame The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation Maximum Size cannot be lower than Minimum Size Maximum Map Size Limits the maximum size of maps in slots The available options are 10 20 300 10xN where N 1 30 or No Limitation Dynamic Permutations Downlink Permutation Base Indicates whether the same downlink permutation base is used over all frames Static or Dynamic Dynamic Permutations Uplink Permutation Base Indicates whether the same uplink permutation base is used over all frames Static or Dynamic 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 1 6 Triggers Tab iB s 2 5m j Ses SA Rado Advanced f VEER 1 Connectivity Basie C Connectivity Advanced O Serves General Det RF 1 Base Bard Ide Mode Aa hi Frame Structure Triggers pad x CP Revert Trigger name Own C tzeere Ju Trigger Name 5 C Trigger value L pgealL vzss Ess Figure 4 26 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Triggers Tab
225. it 0 should be set checked If Segment Number is 1 then bit 2 should be set checked If Segment Number is 2 then bit 4 should be set checked No bit is checked Basic Map Repetition 1 2 4 6 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Default Downlink Data Zone Basic Rate for Management QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 a H LG H H E 16 QAM 1 2 Oo a E a Oo QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 Permutation Base 0 31 0 Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base 0 69 in steps of 1 0 Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base 0 31 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Basic Rate H QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 E QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 E QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 E QPSK 1 2 E QPSK 3 4 E 16 QAM 1 2 E 16 QAM 3 4 E 64 QAM 1 2 E 64 QAM 2 3 E 64 QAM 3 4 E 64 QAM 5 6 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab Ranging Start of Ranging Codes 0 64 128 192 0 IR CDMA Allocation Period 1 2 4 6 8 10 2 Maximum Cell Radius 1 2 4 8 15 23 or 30 2 Feedback Allocation Radio Advanced Page Diversity Transm
226. it Downlink Data MIMO Mode E None Matrix A B E Matrix A E Matrix A B Dynamic Permutations Downlink Permutation Base E Static Static E Dynamic Uplink Permutation Base E Static Static E Dynamic Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Target Noise amp Interference Level PUSC Zone 130 to 110 in steps of 0 5 dBm 127 Power Control Correction Factor 20 to 30 in steps of 0 1 dB 10 ACK 20 to 50 dB 12 CO 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 12 Required C N Level for ACK 8 to Required C N Level for ACK 7 CDMA 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 8 Required C N Level for CQI 8 to Required C N Level for CQI 7 QPSK 1 2 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 14 Required C N Level for CDMA 16 to Required C N Level for CDMA 14 QPSK 3 4 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 16 Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 14 16 QAM 1 2 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 18 Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 7 16 QAM 3 4 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 22 Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 14 64 QAM 1 2 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from 24 Required C N Level for 16 QAM
227. ized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Total Uplink Duration The total duration of the uplink in a frame in slots one slot equals 3 symbols To avoid BS BS interference the ul dl allocation must be identical in all BSs ina geographical region The range is 4 7 for bandwidth of 5 or 10MHz 3 5 for bandwidth of 7MHz After each change in the Bandwidth parameter the value is changed to lt blank gt and must be configured to a proper value 6 10 2 1 3 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab The Air Frame Structure Zones tab enables configuration of the map zone parameters 4 Basic 0 0 2 1 1 1 General Ar Frame Structure General Ar Frame Structure Zones Mobility First Zone Miriam See e s i symbass Madman size 6 v symbols Maxieumn Map Size No Lngate v shits Map Major Groups Bo E ws Hi m s Basic Map Repetition g Dowmiirk Data Zone Permutation Base H E Basic Rate for Management QPSK U2 Repettion 6 Is Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base H E Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base o IS Basic Rate 16 QAM 3 4 ze Batre ye Anc lke Figure 6 45 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab The Air Frame Structure Zones tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description First Zone 4Motion BTS and Mini C
228. k Min Reserved The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kops for downlink traffic carried by the Traffic Rate Kbps service flow The range is 0 40000 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Downlink Max Latency ms The maximum latency in ms allowed in the downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR Downlink Tolerated Jitter ms the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS ERTVR 4 4 2 5 3 UL DL Reference Classification Rule Tabs 9 1 25 H gt L aow O Serve Goup L Qos Marking Fa OOs ee rat een seo a Service Protie Cortig Service Fiow f U Refererxe Cassir aton Ru D Relererce Casstxation Rade ead X lt p Revert Service Profile Number Flow Number Uk Eet Clasahcation Rule Number SE Flow us Al UL Ref Classfication Ride N f O Rule Name Anetes C swe N Figure 4 19 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page UL Reference Classification Rule Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual
229. lation Must be Yes Serial Number The serial number of the NPU card HW Version Number The hardware version of the NPU card HW Revision Number The hardware revision number 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Operational SW Version Number The version of the default software image used for rebooting the NPU after system reset Shadow SW Version Number The version of the downloaded software image that can be used to boot up the NPU Current Running SW Source The software that is currently running on the system Operational or Shadow Refer to Software Upgrade Task on page 288 for details on loading a new SW version and managing the SW versions 6 8 1 2 2 Control The Control section enables defining the action to be taken for a Shutdown or Reset Operation Option Description Shutdown The shutdown operation will shut down the entire site IMPORTANT The system cannot be re activated from remote To re activate the system turn off the power to the PIU s and then turn it on again Reset The site will be restarted All changes in parameters that require reset will take effect after restart Reset To Factory The system will be restarted with factory default configuration IMPORTANT All configurations will be deleted This also means loosing the ab
230. lected are displayed below or to the left of the graph area The following graph controls are available E Pan Zoom button Toggles between the Pan and Zoom modes E Positive Only check box Select to set the boundaries of the values vertical axis between 0 and 100 Deselect the default to set the boundaries between 100 to 100 E Show Legend check box Select the default to display the selected counters legend Deselect to hide the legend E Print Enables to setup the page print the graph or display a print preview You can use the Pan Zoom button to either shift the time axis or change its resolution gt To shift the time axis 1 Make sure that Pan mode is selected If Zoom mode is selected click the button to toggle to Pan mode 2 Drag the graph surface left or right to shift the displayed section of the Time axis gt To change the resolution of the time axis 1 Make sure that Zoom mode is selected If Pan mode is selected click on the button to toggle to Zoom mode 2 Drag the graph surface left or right to change the resolution of the Time axis 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Viewer The Graph and Controls Section gt To print or preview a graph Click on Print A pop up menu opens with three options E Print To open the Print dialog box for selecting a printer setting up the printing properties and printing the graph
231. lliseconds to wait for a response before initiating another polling attempt or reaching a decision that the polled entity has failed if the maximum number of retries set by Number of Retransmissions has been reached The range is from 5000 to 10000 milliseconds 5 to 10 second 4 4 3 5 Services Page The Services page comprises the following tabs E Definitions Tab E Mapping Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 5 1 Definitions Tab Servs apeten v Gre imaning SS GE E pad Ka C Revert E N F Maximum UL Retransmissions z C Pagng Offset frames SEN a 7 Ee Ess Figure 4 40 The BS Template Services Page Definitions Tab The Definitions table includes the following parameter for each row Parameter Description Service Name The name of the service 1 to 32 characters Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates The Definitions Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Name The name of the service 1 to 32 characters Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Maximum DL The maximal number of downlink retransmissions of an HARQ sub burst for this Retransmissions service The range is 0 15 Maximum UL The maximal number of uplink retransmissions of an HARQ sub burst for this Retrans
232. lt Gateway IP Address N A MTU Size Bytes 556 1804 1480 Service VLAN ID 1 9 11 to 4094 Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces Shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID and VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management and External Management interaces N A Default Gateway IP Address Valid IP address Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address Should be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface N A Subnet Mask Valid subnet mak Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces Interface mask should be configured in such a way that the resulting subnet should not overlap with an existing Interface subnet host interfaces other service interfaces N A Enable Checksum Yes No check box Applicable only for IP in IP service interfaces No Service Group Page Service Groups Tab per service group up to 10 Name String 1 to 30 characters N A 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary
233. me of the task A string of 1 to 128 printable characters Software Download Activity The type of upgrade NPU Software Upgrade or AU Software Upgrade AU Software Upgrade is not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The content of the Software Upgrade Settings and Select Equipment sections depend on the selected Software Download Activity 8 4 2 NPU Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade Settings section comprises the following action options when NPU Software Upgrade is selected as the Software Download Activity 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Parameter Description Download to Shadow Loads the upgrade file selected in the File Name selection field below to the Shadow memory of the applicable device s Reboot from Shadow Perform reset and boot from the Shadow file Set as Operational Version Applicable for devices running from the Shadow file Sets the running file as the new Operational file The previous Operational Main file will now become the new Shadow file File Name Available only if the Download to Shadow option is selected The name of the upgrade file to be loaded The drop down menu enables selecting one of the files available in the default firmware folder If another TFTP server is selected see below the file s should be available in the root Otherwise you should specify the full parh and file name
234. meters Parameter Description PHS Rule Number The index number of the PHS Rule 1 255 Name The name alias of the PHS Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Field Value The PHSF value that is the header string to be suppressed Mask Value bits The PHSM that contains the bit mask of the PHSF with the bits set that is to be suppressed Verify Value Indicates whether or not the PHS header is to be verified 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual The Template Configuration Editor Chapter 4 The Template Manager Parameter Description Size Value Bytes The size of the header to be suppressed 0 20 4 4 2 4 3 Figure 4 10 Classification Config Tab iB 1 25 L ew C Service Group L Qos marking FD Se C Service Profile PRS Rues Zeiten Corfiy Clastic aton Pade ried Casiaton Rude Seurue Address Classi x ation Rude Cetra Adiress Zeg lt D ai X G Revert Rule Number Name a Name O posts O 105 Range From E 105 Range To 105 Mast O Ende P 105 C PHS Rule Name J vee D ge Refresh ll Sue k The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Config Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The Classification Config table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the Rule 1 100
235. meters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description QoS Rule Parameters Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS Marking Rule An optional s string of up to 32 characters Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Condition 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 252 BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Service Flow Data Delivery The Service Flow Type for data delivery services uGS rTVR nRTVR BE Type eRTVR or ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority The priority of Service Flow traffic 0 7 or ANY Enable Service Flow Media Indicates whether the condition for Service Flow Media Flow Type is enabled Flow Type or disabled If enabled the Service Flow Media Flow Type will be considered when looking for a match Service Flow Media Flow The Service Flow Media Flow Type as defined in ASN GW or AAA server Type Action Outer DSCP Marking The DSCP value to be used for marking the outer IP header IP GRE The range is 0 63 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic The range is 0 7 6 10 3 2 2 2 Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules The Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Diffse
236. missions service The range is 0 15 Paging Cycle Per Service type policy parameter in PA used to determine Paging Cycle value in frames for the MS during IM Entry and MS Paging The range is from 6 to 1000 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Paging Offset Per Service type parameter in PA used to determine Paging Offset value in frames for the MS during IM Entry and Paging Paging Offset value shall not exceed the chosen Paging Cycle value The range is from 0 to 1000 The default is 0 Traffic Idle Period Traffic Idle period in milliseconds per Service type The range is from 50 to 60000 in steps of 50 Downlink Basic Link The downlink basic rate QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 a a a a a E 16 QAM 1 2 E 16 QAM 3 4 E 64 QAM 1 2 E 64 QAM 2 3 E 64 QAM 3 4 a 64 QAM 5 6 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 5 2 Mapping Tab GIE L ps C Radio Be L Connectivity Advanced 1 Segen Seil kpesssd Ges EH E tad x CH Revert P JS al Ride Index Service Name A D Service Name GD Rue Order II Wa C Dats Debvery Scheduing Type D Privetry for R C Media Fiow Ty
237. n an installed or a required but not installed AU to open the configuration page 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment 6 3 3 6 3 4 for the selected AU refer to AU Slot Page not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 174 E In an installed AU each of the ODU connectors channels are marked as follows Green The ODU port is Up no fault and the ODU port is set to No Shutdown Red The ODU port is Down fault or the ODU port is set to Shutdown HM Double click on an empty AU module to open the New AU dialog box allowing you to define the properties of the AU required for the slot Refer to Creating Deleting an AU not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 172 for more details E Click on an installed AU port to view relevant associations if applicable A blue background will be added to the selected AU Port as well as to the ODU and Site Sector associated with it Outdoor Units View The Outdoor Units view shows the ODU icons all the Outdoor Units up to 28 for Indoor BTS up to 24 for Outdoor BTS that can be defined An undefined ODU is marked in gray A defined ODU is marked in either green or red indicating its operational status Note that the operational status of an ODU can be OK Up only if there are no alarms If you create an ODU and do not associate it s
238. n BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Sector not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Site Sector 1 Ste Sector Delinkion ae AJZ Heading Ve w h o deg Site Sector Association E Au Ske Number Alport Number COU Number G00 Port Number Arzenna Number Antenna Port Number 1 1 1 1 1 Add elo 1 Betresh we n Core Figure 6 62 Site Sector Page The Site Sector page includes the following sections E Site Sector Definition E Site Sector Association 6 11 1 1 Site Sector Definition The Site Sector Definition section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The sector name A describtive string of up to 32 printable characters Heading The sector heading the center angle of the sector in degrees The range is from 0 to 359 The heading of an associated Sector cannot be changed Width The planned sector coverage in degrees The range is from 0 to 359 6 11 1 2 Site Sector Association The Site Sector Association table includes the following read only parameters for each existing site sector association 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Sector not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique ID of the BS AU Sl
239. n of the Airframe Downlink Diversity parameters w 3 Advanced 0 0 2 1 1 1 Feedback Deversty Power Control Mobility Management Ge Trane Downlink Data MIMO Mode A Dynamic Permkabons Downlink PerimAation Base Static v Uplink Permutation Base Skate DN li c gt Betresh e Anc Dore Figure 6 49 Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab The Diversity tab includes the following sections E Transmit E Dynamic Permutations 6 10 2 2 2 1 Transmit The Transmit section includes the following parameter Parameter Description Downlink Data MIMO Mode Read only The diversity mode used in downlink transmissions Matrix A B 6 10 2 2 2 2 Dynamic Permutations The Dynamic Permutations section includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Downlink Permutation Base Indicates whether the same downlink permutation base is used over all frames Static or Dynamic Uplink Permutation Base Indicates whether the same uplink permutation base is used over all frames Static or Dynamic 6 10 2 2 3 Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control tab enables defining the target noise and interference levels w 4 Advanced 0 0 2 11 22 33 EE Feedback Dver
240. n the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard E To open an existing task select a Performance Collection task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task s entry If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task E Ifthe task is Inactive the Performance Collection Task Editor for the existing task is displayed The Performance Collection Task Editor includes three tabs General Tab Section 8 1 1 Entities Tab Section 8 1 2 Actions Tab Section 8 1 3 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Performance Collection Task 8 1 1 General Tab General Entities Actions Task Type Performance Collection Equipment Line 4Motion Task Name Motion Collection 20090818143050 Task Description leie e s kaa Figure 8 1 Performance Collection Task Editor General Tab The General tab of the Performance Collection task includes the following parameters Parameter Description Task Type The type of data to be collected Performance Collection This field is read only Equipment Line The type of equipment from which to collect data Read only in the current version Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characte
241. nager The Template Manager 4 1 m The Template Manager The Template Manager enables managing equipment configuration templates that can be used for modifying configuration of selected devices using the template based Multiple Configuration task see Multiple Configuration Template Based Task on page 301 NOTE In the current release the Template Manager supports BTS equipment templates It does not support Mini Centralized ASN GW templates To open the Template Manager Select Configuration Management gt Template Manager from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The Template Manager window opens Af Eguipment Manager x DI Taskmanager x L Fie Manager x Al Duplicate Ste x Template Manager x Fiter kd a E Name NE Type ji MO Type I SW Version Owner I Template Mode z 1 4M Macro BTS ASN GW npu_2_5_211 admin Add Rows to Tables D 2 4M Macro BTS ASN GW npu_2_5 211 admin Update Parameters 3 4M Macro BTS ASN GW npu_2_5_211 admin Update Multiple Rows 4 4M Macro BTS ES mu 28 211 admin Add Rows to Tables 5 4M Macro 8TS 85 npu_2_5_211 admin Update Parameters 6 4M Macro BTS B5 npu_2_5_211 admin Update Multiple Rows 7 4M Macro BTS Management npu_2_5_211 admin Add Rows to Tables g 4M Macro BTS Management npu_2_5_211 admin Update Parameters 9 4M Macro BTS Management npu_2_5_211 admin Update Multiple Rows Results on page 9 Total 9 PageSize 100 t e page 1 of 1 gt
242. nal DHCP Server IP Address Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only for IP Service Groups using Relay mode The IP address of the external DHCP server Offer Reuse Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The interval in seconds within which the MS should send a DHCP request to accept the address sent by the NPU If the MS does not accept the address within this period the MS is deregistered The range is from 1 to 120 Default Gateway IP Address Not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only in Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is tP address of Default Gateway to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The lease time in seconds of IP address allocated for MS from this Service Group The range is 24 4294967295 In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Renewal Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The interval as a percentage of the Lease Time after which the MS can request renewal
243. nctionality is the same as for Time option above In addition this mode supports postpaid accounting by supporting IP Session Volume Based Accounting The ASN GW will report the cumulative volume counters for each MS IP Session The counters will be collected per MS Service Flow and will be cumulated in order to get the MS IP Session counters Interim Interval Not applicable if Accounting Mode see above is set to None The default interval in seconds for Accounting Interim reports to be used if Acct Interim Interval is not received from the AAA server Value 0 means interim reports are deactivated unless Acct Interim Interval is sent by the AAA server in Access Accept messages The valid range is 0 none or 5 1600 minutes 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The DHCP Function Editor for Server and Proxy modes includes the following parameters Parameter Description Address Configuration Primary DNS Server IP Address of the first DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Secondary DNS Server IP Address of the second DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept IP Address Po
244. ncy ms lt C Upirk Tolerated Jeter me S H Uptiek Unsobcted Grant interval ms d Gage ss Le Figure 4 18 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Flow Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The Service Flow table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Service Profile Number The index number of the Service Profile 1 64 Must be a number of a Service Profile that already exists in the target managed objects Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Service Flow Number The index number of the Service Flow 1 12 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates The Service Flow Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Profile Number The index number of the Service Profile 1 64 Must be a number of a Service Profile that already exists in the target managed objects Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Service Flow Number The index number of the Service Flow 1 12 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Flow ID The flow ID of the service flow A number in the range 1 255 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Convergence Sublayer Type Convergence Sublayer Type ipv4cs or viancs vlancs serv
245. nd Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Suboption 2 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Remote ID Binary Free String Full NAIl Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID For ASCII Agent Remote ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box Agent Subscriber ID and Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information Binary ASCII Agent and Radius Attributes are enabled Suboption 6 of option 82 The available Subscriber ID options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Subscriber ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain For ASCII Agent Subscriber ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box Unicast Relay Agent Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information Information is enabled Indicates whether the Unicast parameter is enabled or disabled RADIUS Attributes Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Ag
246. nfigurable only if Administrative State is Down MTU Size 68 1500 1500 Configurable only if Administrative State is Down VLAN ID 11 100 110 4094 N A Configurable only if Administrative State is Down Not configurable for Local Management IP Routing Page 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Destination Valid IP address N A Mask Valid address mask N A Next Hop Valid IP address N A ACL Page ACL Table ACL Number E 1 99 Standard ACL null M 100 198 Extended ACL HM 199 QoS Marking ACL ACL Name String up to 20 characters ACL Number ACL Active State E Up Down E Down ACL Applicable Interface E None ASN GW E ASN GW E All AU E ASN GW amp All AU ACL Parameters Source IP Address Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 any Source IP Mask Valid IP mask Not applicable for ACL 199 255 255 255 255 Minimum Source Port 1 65535 Not applicable for Standard ACL 0 Maximum Source Port 1 65535 Not applicable for Standard ACL Not 65535 applicable for ACL 199 Destination IP Address Valid IP address Not applicable for ACL 199 0 0 0 0 any Destination IP Mask Valid IP mask Not applicable for ACL 199 255 255 255 255 Minimum Destination Port 1 65535 Not applicable for Standard ACL Not 0 applicable for ACL 199 Maximum Destination Port 1 65535
247. ngle Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Trigger Type Possible Actions Trigger Condition Possible Values Neighbor CINR Own CINR gt Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbour 64 to 63 5 in BS minus the CINR at the steps of 0 5 Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dB Own RSSI lt Scan Request Handover Request The RSSI at the Serving BS is below the Trigger thresholdd in dBm 103 75 to 40 in steps of 0 25 Neighbor RSSI gt Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbour 103 75 to 40 in BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm steps of 0 25 Neighbor RSSI Own RSSI gt 32 to 31 75 in steps of 0 25 Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbour BS minus the RSSI at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm Scan Request The Serving BS distance from the MS calculated by measuring the round trip delay is above the Trigger threshold in meter Distance 0 3400 in steps of 50 if BS BW is Handover Request 10 MHz 0 6800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 5 MHz 0 4800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 7 MHz Note Following any change in Bandwidth the existing Distance triggers must be deleted and redefined 6 10 2 1 4 2 Neighbor List The Neighbor List includes the following read only parameters for each Neighbor BS Parameter Description BS Neighbor ID The BS ID LSB of the Neighbour BS BTS Name The name
248. ni Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 The File Manager The File Manager 9 1 The File Manager The File Manager enables viewing details and managing different types of files stored in the database of the management system gt To open the File Manager 1 Select Administration gt File Manager from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The File Manager window opens 2 In the View field use the drop down menu to select the type of file you want to manage The contents of the window will change according to the selected type The following sections describe the functionality of the following file managers according to the selected type E Equipment File Manager on page 307 HM Duplicate Site File Manager on page 310 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 The File Manager Equipment File Manager 9 2 Equipment File Manager The Equipment File Manager enables viewing details of different files that were retrieved from managed devices and are available in the database of the management system It also enables initiating the Restore Configuration Task see Restore Configuration Task on page 285 exporting files to the client file system and importing files stored in the client file system Files are added to the database by either importing them see details below or by retrieving them from the managed devices using an applicable task Performance Collect
249. nique site identifier a number in the range from 1 to 999999 9 Save and Apply To save the configuration run the command npu write otherwise after the next time reset you will lose the configuration changes To apply the new configuration run the command npu reset 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter d The Equipment Manager Chapter 2 The Equipment Manager In This Chapter E The Equipment Manager on page 7 E The Equipment Editor on page 11 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW CS Device Driver User Manual Chapter 2 The Equipment Manager The Equipment Manager Sch The Equipment Manager The Equipment Manager provides functionality and access to other managers that enables you to effectively manage equipment in your network To open the Equipment Manager Select Managed Network gt Equipment Manager from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The Equipment Manager window is displayed The displayed information and available features depend on the selected type of equipment If additional device drivers are installed click the View selection drop down menu at the top of the window to select the required option System Managed Network Fault Management Configuration Management Servie Provisioning Administration Securty Manayenert Helo b Al ament mansger x Gene setings x LRimmses x Aromo x x giorksese x a view AMBTS J Ftor Ip
250. nit should be in the same subnet together with the NPU s bearer interface in Distributed ASN GW Topolgy IP Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask of the bearer interface of the BS Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway of the bearer interface of the BS Must be in the same subnet with the BS bearer IP Address MTU Size The MTU size in bytes of the bearer interface of the BS The range is 1500 9000 VLAN ID Read only The VLAN ID of the bearer interface of the BS Equal to the NPU Bearer VLAN ID see L1 L2 Connectivity Page on page 140 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 10 3 1 2 Connectivity Basic Page Authentication Tab The Authentication tab enables defining the authenticator IP address and the authentications thresholds for connectivity 4 Basic 0 0 2 0 12 148 Gene A bertcg re DeFauk Authenticate 1P Address 1 1 1 10 Authenbcation Thresholds Suspended EAP Process 1 Active MSs 1 Maximum EAP Rounds 1 el gt Betresh e An LH Figure 6 55 Connectivity Basic Page Authentication Tab The Authentication tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW In Distributed ASN GW Address Topology this is typically the IP address of the NPU s Bearer interface
251. nna Product Type The antenna type The available options includes a list of default and standard antennas The Antenna Product Type of an associated Antenna cannot be modified Information Read only string indicating the characteristics of the Antenna according to the Antenna Product Type The string structure is lt type gt N P A E G F lt EDT Supported gt lt EDT Min gt lt EDT Max gt lt EDT Step gt lt Frequency Min gt lt Frequency Max gt where type part number or one of the default antennas N Number of Ports P Polarization per port Available options are V Vertical H Horizontal 45 45 2 ports DS 45 45 45 45 4 ports DS A Azymuth Beam Width in degrees E Elevation Beam Width in degrees G Gain in dBi F Front to Back Ratio in dB lt EDT Supported gt FALSE or TRUE lt EDT Mins The lowest value in the EDT control range lt EDT Max gt The highest value in the EDT control range lt EDT Step gt The EDT control resolution lt Frequency Min gt The lowest supported frequency in GHz lt Frequency Max gt The highest supported frequency in GHz Description A read only description providing general details according to the Antenna Product Type The details include the antenna manufacturer number of ports polarization azymuth beamwidth if other than omni and gain EDT indicates support of Electrical Down Tilt 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single
252. ns include all the existing Classification Rules see Classification Rules Tab on page 207 The Rule Name of an existing Reference Classification Rule cannot be modified 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The Reference Classification Rule section also includes the following buttons beneath each of the tables Parameter Description Add UL Rule Adds a new entry to the respective table Add DL Rule Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the respective table 6 9 5 ASN GW Keep Alive Page The Keep Alive page enables viewing modifying the parameters of the keep alive mechanism between the ASN GW and relevant BSs Keep Alive elo ch Retreats wi r Figure 6 40 ASN GW Keep Alive Page The Keep Alive page includes the following parameters Parameter Description Enable Keep Alive Use the checkbox to enable disable the ASN GW keep alive mechanism The following parameters are applicable only if Keep Alive is enabled checked 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Polling Period The period In seconds between polling sessions The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds Polling Period x 1000 value
253. nt MS Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address Should be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface Subnet Mask Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The subnet mask of the default gateway Should not overlap with an existing Interface subnet host interfaces other service interfaces 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manage r The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 2 2 2 Service Groups Tab Senica Intertaces Service Groups pad Krou Revert DE Service Group Number Service Group Name D l O Seevice Group Name C OHO pain Mode E Lease Time 5 D115 Loco Back O Radus attributes LI vender Specific G Service aN E Server Host Name C Eternal DHCP Server IP Address C Rebind Time of Lease Time G Relay Agent Information O Binary ASCU agert Gros 1D Gy BinaryJASCTI Agent Remote 1 C Binary ASCI A
254. nt Tab Been sy es 1 Rado Basic 1 Connectivity Basie C Connectivity Advanced ane O services Rang Feedback Alacations Welt Advertisement Power Control Manayewert Handover Negctistionst TBS Trigger Setup G 1 C Uplink Medion Nose dBm D C Uplink 99 Percentie Noise dBm O Best Effort A lt REVR r d O NRT WR u Q uss wy S Cer w gi Refresh w Swe ti Figure 4 31 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Management Tab The Management parameters are Parameter Description Uplink Median Noise The uplink median noise level represents the median value of the noise floor histogram lf the measured uplink median noise level exceeds the value calculated as the target noise and interference level for the PUSC Zone plus the value of the Uplink Median Noise parameter an excessive uplink median noise alarm will be generated The range is from 135 to 100 dBm 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Uplink 99 Percentile Noise The uplink 99 noise level represents the 99 value of the noise floor histogram lf the uplink 99 noise level exceeds the value calculated as the target noise and interference level for the PUSC Zone plus the value of the Uplink 99 Percentile Noise parameter an excessive uplink 99 per
255. nterface I NPU Bekhi Portin Mukicast Pkt 0 1 show Legend z D NPU System Defintion Ra I NPU Bckhi Portin Broadcast Pkt o 1 C NPU User Defined Rate Lit O NPU EH Portin Discards H 1 WU ACL Management I NPU Bekh Portin Errors H 1 Ga Equipment 2 NPU OH Portin Unknown Protos H 1 Ga AsNGWw NPU Bckhl PortOut Ucast Pkt m oi 100 CH NPU Bckhi PortOut Multicast Pkt H 1 I NPU Bckhi PortOut Broadcast Pkt H 1 O NPU Behi PortOut Discards 0 1 I NPU Bckhl PortOut Errors H 1 I NPU Bckh Portin Octet H 1 O NPU Bekh PortOut Octet H ile Counter Graph Group Counters and Selection Selection Controls Section Section sl Section OE oe 124630 124 124830 124 12503 HELI Bckhi Portin Ucast Pkt NPU Bokhi PortOut Ucast Pkt Print Poling Interval sec 10 Le Apply sop k lg E Figure 7 2 The Performance Viewer E The Counters Group Selection Section on page 270 E The Counters Selection Section on page 271 E The Graph and Controls Section on page 273 The Counters Group Selection Section The counters group selection section enables you to select a specific counters group The counters group selection section on the left side of the window displays all the counters groups applicable to the relevant device 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Viewer The Counters Selection Section Use the Expand Collapse check boxes to view hide
256. ntralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Service Interface Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only for IP Service Groups The referenced Service Interface must exist in the database of the relevant managed object The pre defined service interface alias used as the data path for traffic towards the core network Note that a Service Interface can be associated only to a single Service Group DHCP Function Mode Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only for IP Service Groups The available DHCP Function Mode options E Relay The IP address is obtained using an external DHCP server in the non HA mode E Proxy Non HA mode In Non HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns the MS the IP address that was received from AAA in the MS profile In HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns to the MS the IP address received in the MS profile or obtains the IP address from HA using the mobile IP DHCP Own IP Address Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates Applicable only for IP Service Groups The IP address of the DHCP relay proxy For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 Exter
257. o or more templates are selected Opens the Template Editor for the selected template allowing to edit the Name and Description of the template All other general details of an existing template cannot be modified For more details see The Template Editor on page 29 Copy Not available if two or more templates are selected Opens the Template Editor for a new template that is identical to the selected source template with the default name of Copy of lt source template name gt You can edit only the Name and Description of the new template All other general details of the new template cannot be modified For more details see The Template Editor on page 29 Configure Not available if two or more templates are selected Opens the Template Configuration Editor Configure Template for the selected template For more details refer to The Template Configuration Editor on page 30 NOTE You can also open the Configuration Editor by double clicking on the selected template entry Delete Deletes the selected template s from the database The application prompts you for confirmation 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Manager Button Description Import Imports a template XML file from the client file system Click to open the Import window browse to the location on the client file system where the fil
258. of the downloaded software image that can be used to boot up the AU Current Running SW source The software that is currently running on the card operational or shadow Refer to Software Upgrade Task on page 288 for details on loading a new SW version and managing the SW versions The Maintenance Connectivity section enables viewing configuring the parameters of the service interface excluding the VLAN ID used by the AU for uploading maintenance information to an external server the same VLAN ID is used by all service interfaces for details see Site VLAN Configuration on page 142 The Maintenance Connectivity section includes the following parameters Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the service interface Must be unique in the network Mask The subnet mask of the service interface Next Hop The default gateway IP address of the service interface 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment 6 8 1 4 2 AU Control Tab The Control tab lists the parameters that enable controlling operation of the AU 4 AU Slot 2 Cord Properties Control Last Reset Reason Shutdorm Oper ation Normal Oper ation x Shutdown Power AU to COU Port No Sazda E Porte No Shutdown Le Ports NOSTRA ST Ports No Sharon EN MO 1 Biel e dent LH Figure 6 21 AU Slot Page
259. oftware Version The Software Version specified during creation of the Duplicate Site file File Name The name of the file that includes the data and time at which the file was created using the real time clock of the source equipment Date The date and time at which the file was added to the database of the management system using the real time clock of the client Select one or several entries and right click to view the following management options Parameter Description Restore Opens the Restore Task Editor for a selected Duplicate Site file enabling to restore the configuration See Restore Configuration Task on page 285 The Restore Task Editor can also be opened by double clicking on the selected file s entry Delete Deletes the selected file s from the database Export Exports the selected file s to the client file system Click to open the Save window browse to the desired location on the client file system and click Save to export the file s Import Imports an Duplicate Site file from the client file system Click to open the Import Duplicate Site File window browse to the location on the client file system where the file is stored select the file and click Import NOTE The Import option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Devi
260. ol Applicable only in Server mode The range of IP addresses in the address pool From To DHCP address in the pool shall not overlap with the DHCP address pool defined in an existing service group and with IP addresses of host interfaces Bearer External Management Internal Management amd Local Management Add Excluded IP Address Applicable only in Server mode Enables you to add an IP address to the Excluded IP address List see below To add an IP address enter it in the text box and click on the Add button Excluded IP Address List Applicable only in Server mode The list of IP addresses that are to be excluded from the address pool The list can contain up to 16384 IP addresses To remove one or several IP addresses from the list select the addresses to be removed and click on the Delete button Subnet Mask Applicable only in Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is the subnet mask to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only in Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is tP address of Default Gateway to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Address Allocation Timeout Renewal Time The interval as a pe
261. on Server Proxy Mode 194 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Lower Section Server Proxy Mode 195 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Upper Section Relay Mode 195 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Lower Section Relay Mode 196 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab VPWS Mapped Service Type 196 QoS E ee Ne E 203 SFA Page PHS Rules Tab 205 SFA Page Classification Rules Tab Upper Section c cceeceeeeeeeeesteeeeeees 207 SFA Page Classification Rules Tab Lower Section cccceseseceeeeeeeseeeeseees 208 New Service Profile WINDOW scciasesrascxssvecciedegsharneieasnnhunateacecnsheachemunautceemnentagtudns 211 Service Profile Page E 212 ASN GW Keep Alive Page neeesnnnseoeeneoeerrnersrerrssorrrnrerrnnrrnenrsrenrssrrrnnnernnnrnnee 216 AGUANA lee AA 218 Copy Existing BS Window EE 220 Radio Basic Page General Tab 223 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab 225 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab 226 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tae wcrc iiciassesdctencescesevidcoudveaceteantsnns tele beanetaseactaddeiats 231 Neighboring Task Operation Add Neigbbort 234 Device Driver User Manual Figures Figure 6 48 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab 236 Figure 6 49 Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab 237 Figure 6 50 Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab 238 Figure 6 51 Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab
262. on its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR
263. on of the maps using QPSK 1 2 The available options are 1 2 4 and 6 1 means no repetitions Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 31 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Basic Rate for Management The downlink basic rate for management QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Basic Rate The uplink basic rate QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 4Motion BTS and Mini Centraliz
264. only when Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP source addresses Enable IP Destination Indicates whether the use of an associated destination address is enabled for Classifier the classification rule IP Destination Address Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The IP destination address enabled for the classification rule IP Destination Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP destination addresses Layer 4 applicable only for L3 rules Enable TCP UDP Source Indicates whether the use of a range of source ports is enabled for the Port classification rule lf enabled then Enable IP Protocol is set to enable Protocol can be either 6 TCP or 17 UDP TCP UDP Source Port Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Source Port is enabled Configurable only when EnableTCP UDP Source Port is enabled The range of values From To of the source ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 Enable TCP UDP Destination Indicates whether the use of a range of destination ports is enabled for the Port classification rule lf enabled then Enable IP Protocol is set to enable Protocol can be eithe
265. ons The Required section enables viewing editing the required Type of the ODU It also provide read only properties of the ODU based on the required type Parameter Description Type The required ODU type The Type of an associated ODU cannot be editted The Type of an ODU that is not associated to any sector can be updated Refer to Creating Deleting an ODU on page 178 for a list of currently available ODU Types Frequency Band Read only The frequency band supported by the required ODU Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power Read only The maximum Tx power available for the required ODU Type in dBm Port Configuration Read only The Port Configuration of the required ODU Type 1x1 or 4x2 The Installed section displays read only information about the actual Type and the properties of the actual ODU Type These details are available only for an existing and connected ODU that is associated to a sector Parameter Description Type The installed ODU type or ODU not Associated to sector Frequency Band The frequency band supported by the installed ODU Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power The maximum Tx power available for the installed ODU Type in dBm Port Configuration The Port Configuration of the installed ODU Type 1x1 or 4x2 In addition the following ODU general properties are displayed below the Required and Installed sections Parameter Description
266. ontrol Traffic QoS Rules Tab The Control Traffic QoS Rules tab is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The Control Traffic QoS Rules parameters are 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Intra ASN Diffserv Code Point DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 63 Intra ASN 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 7 Internal Management Diffserv Code Point DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 63 Internal Management 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 7 4 4 3 4 2 Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab Bearer Traffic QoS rules tad X C Revert Rule Number Ta Rule Number Marking Rule Name E L 7 Mare Rude Name O Rue Status Service Flow Data Delvery Type L Service Flow Traffic Pricey Service Flow Media Flow Type G Enable Service Flow Meda Flow Type GB Outer DSCP Markig ai O W2 1p Priority Marking Eon sem LH Figure 4 38 The BS Template Connectivity Advanced Page Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table in
267. or Page on page 263 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment 6 3 Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment The Site Equipment View page provides a graphical view of the current status of the BTS s components The display is refreshed every 15 seconds Site 247 Di a g SampleData Er Figure 6 2 Site View Page Indoor BTS The Site Equipment View page includes the following components E Chassis View Indoor BTS or Components View Outdoor BTS according to the type of the managed device E Outdoor Units View E Sectors View E External Devices View 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device 6 3 1 Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment Chassis View Indoor BTS The Chassis view is a graphical display of the BTS showing the installed components and their status Each of the installed modules NPU AUs PIUs PSUs and the 10 fans of the AVU module is marked in a color according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component The following information and actions are available PIUs PSuUs If the module is installed the background color of its number indicates its highest
268. ort Number 1 4 None None QoS Marking Page per rule Rule Status E Enable Enable E Disable Marking Rule Name String 1 to 30 characters Null Rule Applied on Interface E Internal ANY E External E ANY Service Flow Data Delivery Type E UGS ANY E RTVR D NRTVR E BE E ERTVR E ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority 0 7 where 7 is highest or ANY ANY Service Flow Media Flow Type ANY or media flow string 1 30 characters ANY Action Outer DSCP Marking 0 63 0 802 1p Priority Marking 0 7 0 AAA Page ASN GW NAS ID 0 64 charachters Null GMT Time Zone Offset seconds 0 86400 0 VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment E MSB Shift MSB Shift E LSB RADIUS Shared Secret 1 to 49 characters default Primary Server IP Address IP address 172 16 0 10 Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab per service interface up to 10 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Service Interface Name String 1 30 characters null must be specified Description String up to 70 characters Null Type E iP in IP E VLAN IP in IP Tunnel Destination IP Valid IP address Applicable only for IP in IP Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Defau
269. ot Number The AU slot number AU Port Number The AU port number ODU Number The ODU slot number ODU Port Number The ODU port number Antenna Number The antenna number Antenna Port Number The antenna port number The Site Sector Association table also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Adds a new entry to the table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table An existing association cannot be modified to modify an association delete it and add the modified association To add an association click on the Add button A new line is added to the table Double click on each parameter s entry to open a drop down selection menu with the available options according to the status of the relevant components in the database Creation of a new Sector Association entry will succeed only if all the following conditions are met E The specified BS object exists and is properly configured All mandatory parameters have been configured properly The configured frequency is within the valid range defined by the required ODU type in the specified ODU object and the bandwidth parameter The Operator ID is the same as Operator ID configured for previously associated BSs E An ODU Port combination of ODU No and ODU Port No cannot appear in more than one entry 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual
270. oup can be configured to support time based accounting 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW E VPWS QinQ This type of service group is used only for VLAN CS flows Once service group is configured as type VPWS QinQ type IP allocation configuration is not required This type of service group is not associated with any R3 service interface as double tagged MS traffic is transferred transparently on the on the R3 interface The QinQ VLAN used by the MS should be received from the AAA server in Access Accept messages A VPWS QinQ service group can be configured to support time based accounting VPWS Mapped This type of service interface is intended for special needs were VLAN CS service flows from multiple MSs use the same VLAN ID Once service group is configured as VPWS Mapped type IP allocation configuration is not required This type of service group makes the mapping between a unique MS flow VLAN ID used on R3 interface and a CVID The CVID can be missing For this service group type a VLAN pool need to configured The ASN GW will uniquely allocate a VLAN from the configured pool to each MS flow to be used on R3 interface A VPWS Mapped service group can be configured to support time based accounting d gt Service Group Done Service Groups Service Group Name DHCP Functio Service Group Paramet ters 2 SG_data S
271. ows to Tables templates The RF parameter is 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW e Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Center frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are HM 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 BW 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3402 5 to 3597 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3602 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 not supported in current release includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz 4 4 3 1 3 Base Band Tab O Connectivity Advanced O Seng Geeneral Det J RF Base Band cida Mode L Int Frame Siuachare Triggers E Gerechte 5 Di sie Loss LH Figure 4 23 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Base Band Tab The Base Band tab is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW
272. parameters for the new service interface Up to 10 service interfaces can be defined Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table A service Interface associated to a Service Group cannot be deleted x NOTE The Bearer Interface IP Address see IP Interface Page on page 145 must be configured prior to creating any IP in IP or VLAN service interfaces The Service Interface Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Configurable only when adding a new service interface Description A brief desciption of the service interface A string of up to 70 characters Type The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN or QinQ Configurable only when adding a new service interface Tunnel Source IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface Read only The source IPv4 address that indicates the point of origination of the tunnel for the service interface Set to the value of the Bearer Interface IP Address see IP Interface Page on page 145 Tunnel Destination IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface Configurable only when adding a new service interface The destination IPv4 address that indicates the point of termination of the tunnel for the service interface MTU Size Bytes The MTU in by
273. pe H O Use meda Pow Type C Mn Reserved Tratt Rate for RE O Max Sutained Traffic Rate for R E Latency GD Mody Service QoS Parameters O Defa Priorty C Data Debvery Schedkiing Type Gi Priory for R1 gt ka K RI o a O Max Sustained Traffic Rate for R1 O Min Reserved Traffic Rate for R1 E LL Refresh SE Le Figure 4 41 The BS Template Services Page Mapping Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The Mapping table includes the following parameter for each row Parameter Description Rule Index The index number of the Rule 1 255 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Service Name The name of the service Must be a Service Name that already exists in the target managed objects Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates The Mapping Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Rule Index The index number of the Rule 1 255 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Service Name The name of the service Must be a Service Name that already exists in the target managed objects Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Rule Order Defines the order in which the rows of the table are checked to find a match The value of this parameter must be different for each row instance The range is from 1 to 255 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual
274. pen the Service Flow Parameters Editor and enable the Reference Classification Rule Editor for the selected service flow The following buttons are available below the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and open the Service Flow Parameters Editor and enable the Reference Classification Rule Editor allowing to configure parameters for the new service flow Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table 6 9 4 3 2 3 Service Flow Parameters Editor The Service Flow Parameters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Flow ID The flow ID of the service flow A number in the range 1 255 Convergence Sublayer Type Convergence Sublayer Type ipv4cs or viancs vlancs service flows can be defined only for the Default Service Profile Media Flow Type The type of media carried by the service flow An optional string of up to 32 characters Reference Service Group The Name of an existing service group to be used by the service flow VPWS Service Groups are applicable only for VLAN CS Service Flows of the Default Service Profile Reference Service Interface The Name for an existing QinQ service interface Applicable only if the assigned Service Group is of type VPWS QinQ in a VLANCS Service Flow
275. played full details for the selected MS include Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS MS Data MS ID MAC Address the MS ID MAC address Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the serving device Associated Service Flows per flow assigned to the MS SF ID The Service Flow ID Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of All MSs Data Parameter Description Direction The direction of the Service Flow Up or Down Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address The following buttons are now available in addition to the Refresh and Home buttons Button Description Retrieve All MSs Data Click to return to the previous screen displaying summary details for all MSs served by the selected device De Register MS Click to force de registration of the MS Retrieve Selected MS Full Select an entry in the MS Data table and click to retrieve from the ASN GW full Data details for the selected MS 4Motion BTS and Mini Cent
276. pplicable Click on the Add button A new row will be added Some parameters may be set to their default values allowing if applicable modification to other values Configure the required parameters At this stage the change is applied only to the display 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager and the displayed parameters of the new entry are colored green The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button gt To delete one or several entities if applicable Select the entities you want to delete and click on the Delete button At this stage the change is applied only to the display and the displayed parameters of the entries to be deleted are colored red The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW eil Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Introduction to Device Management 6 2 Introduction to Device Management The tree menu in the navigation pane of the Device Manager window enables selecting the following view and configuration pages Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment on page 124 E Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment on page 124 E Site Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 129 E Connectivity L1 L2 Connectivity Page on page 140
277. quipment selector allowing you to add AU s to the task You can select between AU Level Selection adding specific AUs or Site Level Selection adding all AUs in selected Sites Click on the Remove button to delete selected entries from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks File Data Aging Task 8 5 File Data Aging Task The File Data Aging Task enables limiting the time for maintaining equipment and configuration files in the database see also The File Manager on page 304 This is a system task that cannot be deleted To open the File Data Aging Task Editor select the task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the entry File Data Aging days treshold 2019 elle im Ed kal RR x com Figure 8 8 File Data Aging Task Editor The days threshold parameter sets the maximum time to maintain files in the database If the elapsed time since a file was added to the database is higher than the value configures for the days threshold parameter the file will be deleted from the database 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 204 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks CLI Task 8 6 CLI Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the CLI Task is applicable only to the managed device The CLI task enables executing a CLI script file on target device s gt To open t
278. r 6 TCP or 17 UDP TCP UDP Destination Port Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Destination Port is enabled Configurable only when EnableTCP UDP Destination Port is enabled The range of values From To of the destination ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 6 9 4 3 Service Profile The NPU allows for guaranteed end to end QoS for user traffic across the ASN The QoS approach is connection oriented whereby user traffic is classified into service flows A service flow is a unidirectional stream of packets either in the downlink or uplink direction associated with a certain set of QoS requirements such as maximum latency The QoS requirements for service flows are derived from service profiles defined by the operator A service profile is a set of attributes shared by a set of service flows For instance an operator might define a service profile called Internet Gold that will include QoS and other definitions 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW to be applied to service flows associated with users subscribed to the operator s Internet Gold service package The factory default configuration includes an empty no defined Service Flows Service Profile with the name Default If enabled it will be used if profile descriptor is missing in service provisioning or if received pro
279. r Frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are HM 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 BW 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 BW 3402 5 to 3597 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3602 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map Major Groups see below Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied bet
280. r User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation 4 Following discovery by the management system loading the pre prepared Duplicate Site configuration file to the new site using the Restore Configuration task see Restore Configuration Task on page 285 5 Site restart 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard aaa se ae I The Twin Site Creation Wizard This section includes E Introduction E Starting the Twin Site Creation Wizard E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 2 E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step A E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 5 Introduction Creation of a new twin site configuration done is performed using a step by step wizard When the twin site creation process is based on a backup configuration file the file is not supposed to include the following E Parameters having action nature E Parameters having Read Only syntax E Tables in which all parameters are of the action nature or having Read Only syntax Some tables including their whole content are not relevant to any off line configuration related activity as a whole although included in the configuration file All writable parameters of these tables are set to their default values when
281. r for Equipment files select the required backup configuration file right click and select the Restore option or double click on the selected file The Restore Task Editor for a new task with the details of the selected file Type is Site Configuration is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Restore Configuration Task OR In the File Manager for Duplicate Site files select the required file right click and select the Restore option or double click on the selected file The Restore Task Editor for a new task with the details of the selected file is displayed Task Name File Selection Type Site Configuration Name 200908222056 xml gz Creation Date wu Aug 27 13 02 32 IDT 2009 Source Equipment Region BTS Number BTS Name IP Address 10 10 144 35 Auto Reset Destination Equipment Sisner Ern re aai 4M Macro BTS 10 10 144 35 Remove Giele e El Eed D Figure 8 5 Restore Task Editor The Restore Task editor comprises the following fields 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Restore Configuration Task Parameter Description Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters The default name includes the task s type and the date and time at which the task was created Type The type of file to be used by the task E Site Configuration A
282. ralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Single MS De Registration 3 4 Single MS De Registration The Single MS De Registration option is used to force de registration of a specific MS Sytem Managed Network Tak Mangement Configuration Management Service Provisioning Administration Securty Management Hep H iB cavement manager x d Genen ze x D ai rss x remna x Al Setcge ste x gl network mantenance x Network Maintenance Management nn Eeer CH Target ASN GW IP Address MS Outer NAT WE Network Markensnce Server 10 10 107 117 User eden Figure 3 3 Network Maintenance Single MS De Registration To force de registration of a specific MS enter the ASN GW IP Address of the ASN GW currently serving the MS and the MS Outer NAI a string of up to 253 characters The settings of the MS identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server Click Apply to force de registration of the specified MS You can click Home to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager All MSs De Registration 3 5 All MSs De Registration The All MSs De Registration option is used to force de registration of all MSs served by a specific device SyRem Managed Network Fauk Management Configuration Management Ser
283. rameter for each row Parameter Description Manager Number The index number of the SNMP Manager 1 5 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates The SNMP Manager Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Manager Number The index number of the SNMP Manager 1 5 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Community Read Only The SNMP Read Community string allowing execution of SNMP Get operations A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive Community Read amp Write The SNMP Write Community string allowing execution of SNMP Set and Get operations A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor x NOTE The Communities are mandatory and both must be defined other than null Duplication of Communities pairs is not allowed each pair must be unique 4 4 4 1 2 SNMP Trap Managers Tab SNMP Managers SNMP Trap Managers pad X CP Revert P adress 100 27 8 9 IP address a Pore taber DE Gagn E Enable ste Traps enable EI L7 se l zs Kess Figure 4 43 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Trap Managers Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The SNMP Trap Managers table includes the following parameter for each row Parameter De
284. rcentage of the Lease Time after which the MS can request renewal of a lease that has expired The range is from 1 to 100 The renewal Time must be lower than rebind Time This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Parameter Description Rebind Time The rebind interval as a percentage of the Lease Time This is passed to the MS DHCP client The range is from 1 to 99 This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Offer Reuse Time The interval in seconds within which the MS should send a DHCP request to accept the address sent by the NPU If the MS does not accept the address within this period the MS is deregistered The range is from 1 to 120 Management Server Server Host Name The server host name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 64 characters Client Boot File Name The client boot file name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 128 characters Vendor Class Identifier The option 60 string Up to 30 characters An empty string null means that DHCP Option 60 is disabled Vendor Specific Information Name Option 43 Name string Up to 64 characters
285. rent release the applicable devices are GPS and if defined Power Feeder s Power Feeders are not applicable for an Outdoor BTS The GPS indication includes the status of the signal received from the GPS equipment If GPS is not configured the GPS status indication is marked gray Double click on the GPS status indication to open the GPS configuration page refer to GPS Page on page 182 The status indication of a defined Power Feeder PF is always green Double click on the Power Feeder status indication to open the Power Feeder configuration page refer to Power Feeder Page applicable only for Indoor BTS on page 183 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 4 Site Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Site Equipment View page provides a graphical view of the current status of the Mini Centralized ASN GW The display is refreshed every 15 seconds Site E zi ii gt ES lt Lo Bebe Ze e Figure 6 4 Site View Page Mini Centralized ASN GW The Mini Centralized ASN GW view shows the Mini Centralized ASN GW device The color marking on the left side is according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the device Double click on the device s drawing to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 169
286. rer interface To enable VLAN translation and configure the required VLANs translation run the following commands the examples are for backhaul Data VLAN ID 30 and Management VLAN ID 31 assuming the default VLAN IDs for external management and bearer interfaces a Enable the Data port configuration mode npu config interface gigabitethernet 0 10 b Enable VLAN translation npu config if vlan mapping enable c Translate data VLAN 11 to the backhaul data VLAN 30 npu config if vlan mapping 11 30 d Translate management VLAN 12 to the backhaul management VLAN 31 npu config if vlan mapping 12 31 e Exit the interface configuration mode npu config if exit f To view the VLAN mapping parameters run the command npu show interface gigabitethernet 0 10 vlan mapping 4 External Management Interface To configure the necessary parameters of the External Management interface used for connectivity with the EMS system and Local CRAFT Utility run the following commands a Enable the External Management interface configuration mode npu config interface external mgmt b Configure the IP address x x x x and subnet mask y y y y npu config if ip address x x x x y Yy Y Y c Exit the interface configuration mode npu config if exit 5 Apply Changes in Site Connectivity Configuration The system must be reset to apply the changes npu reset 6 Static Route Definition 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Device
287. rimarily for updating selected parameters in all rows of applicable tables It is used also for updating scalar parameters Note that there are some dependencies among certain tables that should be taken into account when designing Add Rows to Tables templates For example if you want to add a new Service Group associated with a new Service Interface the Service Interface must exist in the target objects before you can add the new Service Group This means that you have first to run a Multiple Configuration task using an Add Rows to Tables template containing the new Service Interface and after successful completion of this task run another Multiple Configuration task using a different template containing the new Service Group 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Editor 4 3 The Template Editor Template Name cake ar NE Type v Software Version v MO Type Ki Template Mode Add Rows to Tables Owner admin Creation Date 18 08 2009 16 54 51 D ce Figure 4 2 The Template Editor The Template Editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description Name The name of the template A string of 1 to 128 characters Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task A string of 0 to 250 characters NE Type The type of Network Elem
288. riority values to be applied on service flows using best match logic For example if we have the following two marking rules for BE traffic Data Flow Delivery Type set to BE A Interface Type set to Internal R6 interface All other parameters set to ANY B All other parameters including interface type are set to ANY Than Rule A will apply to all BE traffic transmitted on the internal R6 interface Rule B will apply to all other BE traffic meaning traffic transmitted on the external R3 interface 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 202 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW D on 10 0 22 247 Confinming boageent e E H QoS Marking Boarer Mare Q05 Aides Ride Mate Rude Statue Mashing Rude Qos Rule Parameters V ce st diak Marling Ride Name J Frable eat _dofautt nt nan natin ee TY il Rena Enge S Coren Rude Applied on Interface ANY Service Flow Data Delvery Troe anv nal Servas Flow Dr it Proart Cy Li Servier Flow Modin Flew Type An Ate Cuter Det Marking a DC 16 Priority Madang jo KA Hla tires Ar Cone Figure 6 34 QoS Marking Page The QoS Marking page comprises two sections the Bearer Plane QoS Rules table and the QoS Rule Parameters Editor The Bearer Plane QoS Rules table includes the following read only parameters for each existing rule Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the rule An au
289. rm Numbers to pins in the ALRM IN connector 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page Parameter Description Name The name of the input alarm Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the following options E Commercial Power Failure Fire Enclosure Door Open High Temperature Flood Low Fuel Low Battery Threshold Generator Failure Intrusion Detection External Equipment Failure Send Alarm Defines the contacts condition for activating the alarm Close or Open Blocking Indicates whether or not blocking is applied for the input alarm yes or no If blocking is applied alarm will not be generated regardless of the status of the input Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the on and off options The mapping of the ALRM IN connector s pins to alarms is Pin Number Alarm Number 3 and 15 1 4 and 16 1 and 17 6 and 18 7 and 19 8 and 20 9 and 21 Orn oA A OO N 10 and 22 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page 6 5 2 2 Output Alarm Dry contact output alarms can be raised cleared by the user to notify an external device connected to the BTS unit The Outputs Alarm table includes the following parameters
290. rmance Opens the Performance Monitoring Viewer for the selected device Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the State of the selected device is other than Up For more details refer to The Performance Viewer on page 267 Multiple Configuration Opens the template based Multiple Configuration Task allowing simultaneous configuration of several devices The selected devices are automatically included in the Equipment tab of the Multiple Config task Refer to Multiple Configuration Template Based Task on page 301 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 2 The Equipment Manager The Equipment Manager Button Description Backup Configuration Opens a Configuration Backup Task for the selected device s Available only if the State of all selected devices is up Refer to Backup Configuration Task on page 282 Export Exports the general information of the selected device s to an external Comma Separated Value CSV file Opens the Exports Equipments dialog box in which you can browse to the desired location enter a file name and click Export The information displayed for the selected device s in the Equipment Manager is exported Open Alarms Opens the Open Alarms window displaying the details of currently active events Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the State is other than Up 4Motion
291. rmance Management document 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Management Page H Management Managers List Performance Logging Performance Groups Activation Connectivity C Bathu Poet E interna Ethernet Port E Management Port Cascade Port External Management Interface E Local Management Interface Wl Internal Management Interface BS E RxR Total traffic B intogrty E Oi Frame Data zore rastograms General B Trafic LISS Basie Mode E tization E tx kt Tota Traffic ASN GW 1 Betresh wv n LH Figure 6 15 Management Page Performance Tab The Performance page includes the following components Parameter Description Performance Group A list of counters groups as detailed below with a check box next to each group s Activation name Select a check box to enable collection and storage of performance data for the counters group x NOTE Certain counters groups are not fully supported in the current release Collection of these counter groups cannot be enabled For the Mini Centralized ASN GW only the InOctets and OutOctets counters of the Backhaul Port Cascade Port External Management Interface and Bearer Interface indicating the total number of bytes received or transmitted on the relevant interface are fully supported in the current release Do not use any other counter as its value
292. rofile is enabled or disabled 6 9 4 3 2 2 Service Flow Table Service flows are unidirectional stream of packets either in the downlink or uplink direction associated with a certain set of QoS requirements such as maximum latency and minimum rate Based on certain classification rules service flows are transported over the R1 air interface in 802 16e connections identified by connection IDs and identified by GRE keys over the R6 interface in GRE tunnels In addition the ASN GW can mark outgoing traffic in the R3 interface for further QoS processing within the CSN The system supports two types of service flows according to the convergence sublayer CS type IP CS and VLAN CS An IP CS service flow can be associated only with an IP service group A VLAN CS service flow can be associated only with a VPWS Transparent QinQ Mapped service group VLAN CS service flows can be configured only for the Default Service Profile Up to 12 Service Flows can be defined for each Service Profile The Service Flow table includes the following read only parameters for each service flow of the service profile Parameter Description Flow Number The index number of the service flow An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 12 generated automatically during creation of a new service flow Flow ID The flow ID of the service flow for which the service flow configuration mode is enabled Select an entry to o
293. rs The default name includes the task s type and the date and time at which the task was created Note that when using the Task Wizard the default task name automatically replaces the name selected in the first Create New Task step Description An optional brief description of the task 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Performance Collection Task 8 1 2 Entities Tab The Entities tab enables the selection of existing entities for performance collection Performance Collection General ee Actions leie E fe BEB xen CAG m kl ES Figure 8 2 Performance Collection Task Editor Entities Tab The Entities tab includes the following controls Add Opens the Equipment Selection window with the list of available devices allowing you to select the device s to be added to the task Remove Removes selected entities from the list The following information is displayed for each entity in the list 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW el Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Performance Collection Task Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system Name The name of the device as configured in the device Type The type of device BTS Number The ID number of the device Site ID as configured in the device Software Version The running software version of the de
294. rv Code Point DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 63 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 7 6 10 3 2 2 3 Internal Management Traffic QoS Rules The Internal Management Traffic QoS Rules section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Diffserv Code Point DSCP priority value to be used for marking of internal management traffic The range is 0 63 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of internal management traffic The range is 0 7 6 10 3 2 3 Connectivity Advanced Page Keep Alive Tab The Keep Alive page enables viewing modifying the parameters of the keep alive mechanism between the BS and relevant ASN GWs 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Advanced 255 243 41 0 0 3 1D 1P Macping QoS Marking Rules Keep Alive LI Enable Keep Alve Polling Period 6 number OF Retranamissioes Retransmission Timeout ms Wl gt Seier e nr Core Figure 6 58 Connectivity Advanced Page Keep Alive Tab The Keep Alive page includes the following parameters Parameter Description Enable Keep Alive Use the checkbox to enable disable the BS keep alive mechanism The following parameters are applicable only if
295. rvice Groups Tab Lower Section Server Proxy Mode Service Group Service Groups ai Sarvan Garp Down OH Functor N T C Enade Relay Agent Information Relay Agerk Inlormation Par aneters Ervabiee Un zi Peter Aypi bt Taa At Grout ID tox Zei D E Wi Lopes ven Fe SE Figure 6 31 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Upper Section Relay Mode 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW D on 10 10 144 201 Configuring Equipment eee e 0 5 4 Service Group Service Irterface Name l onnon BR Lease Tme 25 400 DHCP Own IP address 0 0 0 0 J MS HS Loop Back Drais Iv Enable Service YLAN Accounting Accounting Mode Tima based v Interim interval 5 S mn L Add Service Group Delete DHCP Function e External DHCP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Agerk OR 1D Net Set Ki Birary ASCTI Agent Cros 1D Agent Remote 1D Not Set Drama Agent Remote ID k biet Subscriber ID Not Set ze Ki BinsryjASCTI Agent Subscriber 1 Ha gets d n Core Figure 6 32 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Lower Section Relay Mode d D Service Group Service Groups ce Name TOP FUNDO Servia Group Parameters 1 a server Name Kn 3G daa Server ET al te pe d Accourting E Aceounting Mode Tine hosed x Intenta interval T
296. rvice QoS Parameters is enabled and the data delivery type is UGS RT VR or ERT VR Jitter An internal R1 profile parameter specifying maximum tolerated jitter in milliseconds The range is 0 5000 Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and the data delivery type is UGS or ERT VR 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Grant Interval An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the grant interval in milliseconds The range is 0 5000 Relevant only if modify serviceqos is TRUE and the data delivery type is UGS or ERT VR 4 4 4 Management Template The Management Template comprises the following pages E SNMP Managers Page E Performance Page E Logging Page 4 4 4 1 SNMP Managers Page The SNMP Managers page comprises the following tabs E SNMP Managers Tab E SNMP Trap Managers Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 4 1 1 SNMP Managers Tab SNMP Managers SNMP Trap Managers Add X lt p Revert Manager Number JS Manager Number N L pes vs Figure 4 42 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Managers Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The SNMP Managers table includes the following pa
297. ry Chapters and Device Driver AlvariCRAFT Added AlvariCRAFT to the shared platform March 2009 The Equipment Manager Updated to reflect all GUI changes of August 2009 Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 New feature Open Alarms Updated functionality of Multiple Configuration and Backup Configuration options Site Equipment View Page Added support for Outdoor BTS General August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Site Page General Tab Removed Shelf HW Version parameter Updated range for Site Address Updated ranges for Longitude and Latitude Updated description of Product Type Updated Site Number change process Added warning a change in ASN Topology will take effect after next reset August 2009 Site Page Dry Contacts Tab New feature Send Alarm condition for Input Alarms Applicable only for Indoor BTS August 2009 Site Page Time Tab Removed Clock Source parameters August 2009 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Removed External Management VLAN ID Added AU Maintenance VLAN ID Ethernet port are configurable also if Admin Status is enabled Up Added warning a change in Connectivity Mode will take effect after next reset CSCD port is applicable only for Indoor BTS Updated description of VLAN Assigned August 2009 IP Interface Page No need to shut down the in
298. s Bearer interface Suspended EAP Process Suspended EAP authentification process threshold It is used to set an alarm The range is 0 10000 Active MSs The threshold for the number of MSs in active operation state not Idle served by the BS Exceeding this threshold sets the alarm Excessive MS number The range is 0 1024 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Maximum EAP Rounds The threshold for the number of EAP rounds in one direction in the same EAP session When this threshold is exceeded alarm is set This threshold may be used to protect the system from hazard EAP sessions with extreme number of messaging round trips The range is 0 100 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled 4 4 3 4 Connectivity Advanced Page The Connectivity Basic page comprises the following tabs E Control Traffic QoS Rules E Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab E Keep Alive Tab 4 4 3 4 1 Control Traffic QoS Rules Control Traffic QoS Rules _ Bearer Trallic QoS rules Keep Abee C INTRA ASN Dffsery Code Pore C INTRA ASN 802 Ip Priority UI interna Management Diffserv Code Poirt lt le Ejio C internal Management 002 10 Pricey Aa oxesow LH Figure 4 37 The BS Template Connectivity Advanced Page C
299. s for each BS participating in the task BS Neighbor ID The BS ID LSB of the neighbor BS BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the beighbor BS BTS Name The BTS Name of the neighbor BS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Mass Neighboring Task Click Add to open the BS Selector allowing you to add BSs to the table The list of neighboring BSs available in the BS Selector includes all BSs that are defined as neighbors of other BSs or as having at least one neighbor and is updated through the Add Delete and Delete from Neighbors Neighboring tasks initiated from the BSs see Neighbor List on page 233 Click Remove to remove one or several selected BSs from the table The task includes Send Update to All Neighbors and Get Update Neighboring Tasks to from all BSs participating in the task If the task includes all neighboring BSs through enabling the Select All option then only the Send Update task to all relevant BSs is executed since this is sufficient for complete update 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Multiple Configuration Template Based Task 8 8 Multiple Configuration Template Based Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Multiple Configuration Task is applicable only to the managed device The Multiple Configuration task enables modifying the configuration of selected devic
300. s for the following managed object types E ASN GW Template E BS Template E Management Template Managing Tables The principles of managing template tables depend on the template type E Managing Tables in Add Rows to Tables Templates E Managing Tables in Update Parameters Templates E Managing Tables in Update Multiple Rows Templates Managing Tables in Add Rows to Tables Templates Each row in the table has one or more index numbers or another type of unique identifier Some rows have also a name associated with the specific entry To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row configuration window will open enabling you to configure the mandatory row identifier s If relevant you can also configure the identification name of the row Configuring the identification name at this stage is optional It is available for configuration also in the row s parameters editor Note that the parameters editor allows you to later modify the row identifier s of the row 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 1 2 The row identifier s in tables of Add Rows to Tables templates must be defined taking into account the relevant existing row identifier in the target objects that will participate in the Multiple Configuration task using the template A row with row identifier s that already exist in th
301. sable check box Enable Idle Mode Enable Disable check box Enable Fast Feedback CQI Handling Enable Disable check box Enable Ack Nack Channel Handling Enable Disable check box Enable End Transaction Update Enable Disable check box Enable DL Frame Data Zone Histograms Enable Disable check box Enable Tx R1 Net Traffic Enable Disable check box Enable Rx R1 Net Traffic Enable Disable check box Enable Tx R1 Total traffic Enable Disable check box Enable Rx R1 Total Traffic Enable Disable check box Enable DL HARQ Sub Bursts Drop Enable Disable check box Enable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default DL HARQ Transmission Enable Disable check box Enable General Enable Disable check box Enable All MS Basic Mode Enable Disable check box Disable MS Advanced Mode Enable Disable check box Disable Management Page Logging Tab Remote Log Server Enable logging to server Enable Disable check box Disable Server IP Valid IP address 192 168 0 1 Log to File Enable logging to file Enable Disable check box Enable Log Severity Log Severity per module E Disable Error E Emergency E Alert E Critical E Error E Warning E Notice E Informational Power Supply Page PIU Card Properties Slot 1 2 Required E Yes Yes E No R
302. scription IP Address The IP address of the SNMP Trap Manager 1 5 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates The SNMP Trap Manager Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the SNMP Trap Manager 1 5 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Port Number The port number on which the Trap Manager will listen for messages from the Agent The range is from 1 to 65535 The port on which the management system listens for traps is 162 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Community The name of the SNMP Read Community used by the Trap Manager Traps are sent toward those Managers for which this parameter is configured A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive Enable Site Traps Indicates whether the sending of traps to the management station is enabled or disabled 4 4 4 2 Performance Page The Performance page comprises the NPU Counters and AU Counters tabs UW Courkers BS Counters Pad X lt p Revert Performance Groups Activation Badiha Port Di Performance Groups Activation 5 E rop Activation activate L seal zs Kc Figure 4 44 The Management Template Performance Page NPU Counters Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The
303. severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Power Supply Page applicable only for Indoor BTS on page 168 but is not installed the background color is yellow Double click on an installed or a required but not installed module to open the Power Supply configuration page refer to Power Supply Page applicable only for Indoor BTS on page 168 Double click on the NPU module to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 169 In an installed AU the background color of its number indicates its highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Card Properties on page 170 but is not installed the background color is orange If a module is installed but not defined yet the background color is purple Double click on an installed or a required but not installed AU to open the configuration page for the selected AU refer to AU Slot Page not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW on page 174 In an installed AU each of the ODU connectors channels are marked as follows Green The ODU port is Up no fault and the ODU port is set to No Shutdown Red The ODU port is Down fault or the ODU port is set to Shutdown Double click on an empty AU module to open the New AU dialog box allowing you to define the properties of the AU
304. sneeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenenes 122 6 3 Site Equipment View Page for BTS Equipment ccccsseeeesseeceeeeseseeeeenseeeees 124 6 3 1 Chassis View Indoor BTS dcsccceicsscncennecnceieadeceteat ia eeatdanisnetseeetabemecemsaseree 125 6 3 2 Components View Outdoor BI 126 6 3 3 Outdoor Units EE 127 6 34 Sectors Eeer 127 6 3 5 External Devices View eessen Eed EEEE ge deehEEEe dE Cgee 128 6 4 Site Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized ASN GW ccccccsssssseeceeeeees 129 E imme oi 2 lt n ee ee a re eee PE ee eee ene ener 130 6 5 1 EC HR E E 130 6 5 2 Dry Contact Tab applicable only for Indoor BTS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 134 05 3 KE EE 137 6 6 010 1 TE 140 6 6 1 L1 L2 Connectivity EE 140 6 6 2 IP Interface Page nnnnnnnsnsonnrnnnnsnsrnnnnnnneneneeensnnnnnnnnronnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnonnuneenennnenne 145 6 6 3 IP Fouer 148 6 6 4 QoS Marking Rules e nenene 149 665 ACL Rage croire E ved cenaridecd etre etwas 151 6 7 Management PAGE isiccaicencisceswccensecsaisintesdutendvenicatsiateanetsancisiancanesisaaeasansecsmenanieis 159 6 7 Managers List TaD E 159 6 7 2 Performance TAD EE 161 6 7 3 Logging RE E 165 GO Un naanin vanik dandanas kada aananian asn oanandtaaaaas 167 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Contents 6 8 1 EE 167 6 8 2 External not applicable for Mini Centralized AN GW 177 69 ASN OW asic csc eck ck ce ee cea a a tc pe etna cee cate ee
305. sociated Sector cannot be changed Width 0 359 0 Site Sector Association Add BS ID LSB The available BS IS LSBs null AU Slot Number The available AUs identified by the Slot null Number AU Port Number 1 4 null ODU Number The available ODUs null ODU Port Number 1 or 1 4 according to the type of selected ODU null Antenna Number 1The available Abntennas null Antenna Port Number According to number of ports configured for the null selected antenna 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual
306. ss no need to click Apply on Radio Advanced and Connectivity pages after completing configuration of mandatory parameters August 2009 Copy BS New feature August 2009 Radio Basic Page General Tab Added Idle Mode parameters Updated range for Center Frequency August 2009 Radio Basic Page Air Fame Structure General Tab Removed Enable Uplink Sub Channel Rotation August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ul Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab Removed Map Size added new First Zone parameters Minimum Size Maximum Size Maximum Map Size Added Uplink Data Zone Basic Rate Added Downlink Data Zone Basic Rate for Management Downlink Data Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Feedback Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Data Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Data Zone Start Allocation were removed Removed Dynamic Permutation parameters moved to Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab August 2009 Radio Basic Page Diversity Tab Moved to Radio Advanced Page August 2009 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab New Tab name was Handover tab Added Neighbor column to Triggers table Updated parameters in Neighbor List table Updated button name Choose Neighbor changed to Add Entry Add details on Neighboring Task August 2009 Radio Advanced
307. ssneessenesserrssrrnrerrrntrstnessernnnrtennrntnnnrssrrrnseern nnet 149 Figures O13 ACL EE 155 Figure 6 14 Management Page Managers List Tab 159 Figure 6 15 Management Page Performance Tab ccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeenenenens 162 Figure 6 16 Management Page Logging Tab 2 cccceeeseseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneneseeetens 165 Figure 6 17 Power Supply Page AEN 168 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Figures Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW BIN PS geesde ee eege 170 New AU WIndoW ya sacacsacanparnsass cousnwaniansianrnimniaamiarsiantnaineeiieanonetbncsaaacideimarnneinl 173 AU Slot Page Card Properties Tab 175 AU Slot Page Control Tan EE 177 New ODU Wind W EE 178 e 2 0 ee ee ee ee ee Ree ee re eer eee ee 179 RA eG teers goa cee eames cnet ect ca cece eoeeec E EE 182 Power Feeder Eeer Eet 183 Antenna FAY E 184 AAA WP AG E 189 Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab 191 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Upper Secti
308. sty Power Control Mobility Management Ge Target Noise amp Interference Level PUSC Zone 127 dam Power Corkrol Correction Factor 10 w Repaired C N Levels ace L J E a coma a a PK 2 L a 16 QAM 1 2 18 W I 16 QAM aja z a 64 Q0M 1 24 EI 64 QAM 2 3 se DEED e 64 Q0M 5 6 EN elle Lo geil v s Dore Figure 6 50 Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control tab includes the following parameters Parmeter Description Target Noise amp Interference Level PUSC Zone The target noise and interference level for the PUSC zone in dBm The range is from 130 to 110 in steps of 0 5 dBm 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parmeter Description Power Control Correction Factor Correction in dB of max allowed UL SINR given DL SINR measurement The higher the correction factor is the higher is the allowed UL Tx Power The range is from 20 to 30 in steps of 0 1 dBm Required C N Levels ACK The C N in dB required for sending ACK reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB CO The C N in dB required for sending CAI reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for ACK 8 to Required C N
309. t 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 6 6 Connectivity The Connectivity node includes five pages E L1 L2 Connectivity Page E IP Interface Page E IP Routing Page E QoS Marking Rules Page E ACL Page 6 6 1 L1 L2 Connectivity Page The L1 L2 Connectivity page enables viewing modifying defining the various aspects of site connectivity such as Connectivity Mode VLAN IDs VLAN translation and the parameters of Ethernet ports H L4 L2 Connectivity Al AMS Correntivdy Mode Ske VLAN Configurations P internal Managemen WAN ID mg Drema Ether type uoe lv tn Band O Ok ol Band Local Management VLAN ID 2 aUnertenareg an 14 3 O United Bearer WLAN ID u Ja Ethernet Ports Port Arimiristrariv Operator Stabe Schmu atve Rate ke vw Down Nagetunion ius D Cascade W owe Port speed d E Duplex Mode Fa Duc D Eneapradation Mede NAN Assigned Max Frame Sue wt Badhai VLAN Translation C Enstie VLAN ID Trarsistion Sei z passt d Se Done cd Figure 6 8 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Upper Section 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity d AA L1 L2 Connectivity Port tt Operator Kate Achranestsative Rate Li nagesent Ir Down Negotiation we R Cascade up Down Port Speed X D faginy Made Aa Dup
310. t pre configured service profile cannot be deleted 6 9 4 3 2 Service Profile Page The Service Profiles page enables viewing the Service Profiles in the device s database defining new Service Profiles and editing or deleting existing Service Profiles Name Profle zap Drei Service Profiles Parameters Service Few Fow Number Foe Ei Service Now Parameters i Fae Fon ID Conwergnnen Sublyer Type Medis Flow Type Relererne Service Group Upik Downlink Data Deivery Type yy BE j Max Sustained Traffie Rate ried zen S EJ 3 He Reserved Trathe Rata kbps Traffic Priorty o Ei v a Max Laterncy ims Tolerated Wter ms Vi Lr ckoted Grant Interval ms Reference Gasification Rude EE Reboreinee Gassfwration Rule bes Sade Nene Ot Reference Clavefiention fia Number 1 Rude tamer Ge elle ic etresty Anc Dorm Figure 6 39 Service Profile Page The Service Profiles page includes the following sections M General Service Profile Parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW E Service Flow Table M Reference Classification Rule Section 6 9 4 3 2 1 General Service Profile Parameters The General Service Profile parameters at the top of the page are Parameter Description Name The read only name of the service profile Profile Status Indicates whether the p
311. t Create to open the New AU window You can also double click on an empty slot in the Site Equipment View Page see Chassis View Indoor BTS on page 125 to open the New AU window for the selected slot See table below for mapping of Outdoor Macro BTS AUs to slot numbers Table 6 4 Mapping of Outdoor Macro BTS AUs to Slot AU Slot AU of NAU 7 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW da Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment Table 6 4 Mapping of Outdoor Macro BTS AUs to Slot AU Slot SAU 1 Master AU of DAU 1 left side of DAU 1 2 Slave AU of DAU 1 right side of DAU 1 3 Master AU of DAU 2 left side of DAU 2 8 Slave AU of DAU 2 right side of DAU 2 9 AU Mandatory Parameters Type AU 4x4 Modem AU Number AU slot 9 ly Figure 6 19 New AU Window 2 Configure the mandatory properties of the required AU in the New AU window Parameter Description Type The required AU type In the current release only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable AU Number Select the required slot number The available options include all currently empty slots AU entity does not exist The AU Number is read only if the New AU window was opened by double clicking on an empty slot in the Site Equipment View page 3 Click Apply to complete the new AU creation The new AU will
312. t applicable If enabled Default Priority is not applicable Availability of other parameters depends on selected option for Data Delivery Scheduling Type Default Priority The traffic priority to be used when priority is missing in the R6 request Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is not enabled The range is 0 7 Priority for R1 An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the traffic priority Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and Data Delivery Scheduling Type is other than UGS The range is 0 7 Data Delivery Scheduling Type for R1 An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the type of data delivery service type Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled Available types are UGS RT VR NRT VR BE ERT VR Min Reserved Traffic Rate for R1 An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the minimum reserved traffic rate in Kbps The range is 0 40000 Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and Data Delivery Scheduling Type is other than BE Max Sustained Traffic Rate for R1 An internal R1 profile parameter specifying the maximum sustained traffic rate in Kbps The range is 0 40000 Relevant only if Modify Service QoS Parameters is enabled and Data Delivery Scheduling Type is other than UGS Latency for R1 An internal R1 profile parameter specifying maximum latency in milliseconds The range is 0 5000 Relevant only if Modify Se
313. t it and click on the Remove button above the table The Triggers Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Trigger Name The Trigger Name that includes the Trigger Type and Action For details refer to the table below Trigger Value The threshold value for the trigger For CINR triggers the range is 64 to 63 5 in steps of 0 5 dB For RSSI triggers the range is 103 75 to 40 in steps of 0 25 dBm For Distance triggers the range in meters is 0 3400 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 10 MHz 0 6800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 5 MHz 0 4800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 7 MHz Trigger Type Possible Actions Trigger Condition Own CINR lt Scan Request The CINR at the Serving BS is below the Trigger threshold in dB Handover Request Neighnor CINR gt Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbour BS is above the Trigger threshold in dB Neighbor CINR Own CINR gt Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbour BS minus the CINR at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dB Own RSSI lt Scan Request The RSSI at the Serving BS is below the Trigger thresholdd in dBm Handover Request Neighbor RSSI gt Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbour BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm Neighbor RSSI Own RSSI gt Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbour BS minus the RSSI at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm Distance Scan Request The
314. t the required ODU Type and the ODU Number to be assigned to it only unassigned numbers are available for selection For Indoor BTS ODU numbers range is 1 to 28 For an Outdoor BTS ODU number range is from 1 to 24 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment 3 Click Apply to complete the new ODU creation The new ODU will be added to the list of ODU available in the ODU sub node To fully complete the creation of the ODU you should update the Ports Configuration if necessary and click Apply in the ODU page see ODU Page on page 179 gt To delete an ODU To delete an ODU right click the required ODU entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation IMPORTANT An associated ODU specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector Page on page 263 6 8 2 2 ODU Page The ODU node includes an ODU page for each created ODU The ODU page displays the properties of the respective ODU Serial Number O External Cavity Fiker Oastence Figure 6 23 ODU Page 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Equipment The ODU page includes the following sections E General E Ports Configuration 6 8 2 2 1 General The General section is divided into sub secti
315. task click Add to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Target Equipment table Click Remove to remove one or several selected devices from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task 8 4 8 4 1 Software Upgrade Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Software Upgrade Task is applicable only to the managed device This section includes E The Upgrade Task Editor E NPU Software Upgrade E AU Software Upgrade not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Upgrade Task Editor Software upgrade is performed by loading the requested software files to the shadow memory of the devices using TFTP and activating the new software version at a desired moment according to a predetermined process Software upgrade consists of several actions that need to be performed E Selecting devices to be included in each software upgrade task E Defining the software file s to be loaded E Scheduling the task optional E Defining the actions that should take place once the new software file is loaded into the devices Note that the task can also be used to manage the existing software files in the device without loading a new upgrade file When working under Windows the files to be loaded should be available in the management system firmware folder filesystem firmware wm The wm folder may need to be manually
316. te Creation Antennas No Antennas Heading d Antennas Longitude Antennas Latitude d Antennas Tower Heia Antennas Mechanical Antennas Electrical D Antennas Cable Loss 1 o 000 000 E 00 000 N a a o 2 o 000 000 E 00 000 N H H o os Duplicate Site Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 5 6 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 5 The fifth and last screen of the wizard includes the following parameters Parameter Description Antennas up to 28 No The index number of the antenna Heading deg Used only for information inventory purposes The the azimuth angle in degrees between the center of the horizontal antenna beamwidth and the true north counting clockwise The range is from 0 to 359 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description Longitude deg Used only for information inventory purposes The longitude of the antenna The format is Ill mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Latitude deg Used only for information inventory purposes The latitude of the antenna The format is Il mmm aill is longitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is S south or N nort
317. ted Jitter ms the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this uplink downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS ERTVR Unsolicited Grant Interval The nominal interval in ms between successive data grant opportunities for this ms uplink service flow The range is 0 65535 Must be lower than Uplink Max Latency Relevant only for uplink service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR 6 9 4 3 2 4 Reference Classification Rule Section The Reference Classification Rule section enables managing rules for the classification of uplink and downlink traffic The Reference Classification Rule section includes two tables one listing the UL Reference Classification Rules and the other listing the DL Reference Classification Rules Note that for VLANCS service flows the linked uplink and downlink classification rules should be the same This is because the VLANCS classification rules define the CVID Customer VLAN ID that should be the same for uplink and downlink flows These tables include the following parameters Parameter Description UL DL Reference The index number of the UL or DL Reference Classification rule An Classification Rule Number auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 6 generated automatically during rule addition Rule Name The name of the associated Classification Rule The available optio
318. ter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 3 2 8 QoS Tab C Connectivity Advanced L Serves ss Feedback cations Nagin Siebert Power Conte Manapenert Hanover Beete Les Setan S Beie mode Equal Rate lv BR Steis D Abuse Protection Level None EI BW Secher UL Abuse Protection Level None lv lt A Refresh v Save t Figure 4 34 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS parameters are Parameter Description Scheduler Mode The basis for allocating excess bandwidth among relevant users E Equal Rate Throughput Fairness E Equal Time Resource Fairness The selected mode is applicable for both uplink and downlink schedulers Scheduler DL Abuse Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate Protection Level None No Protection Low Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with very low DL transmission Rate Medium Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low DL transmission Rate 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor Parameter Description Scheduler UL Abuse Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate Protection Level None No Protection Low Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with very low UL transmission Rate Medium Limit th
319. terface for modifying IP Interface parameters Added warning reset required after changing Bearer Interface IP Address August 2009 ACL Page Updated with details on automatically created ACLs August 2009 Management Page Performance Tab Collection of Counters Groups that are not fully supported by the device cannot be enabled Removed Performance Collection Interval August 2009 Management Page Logging Tab Updated description of Server IP August 2009 NPU Page Added Reset To Factory With Connectivity option August 2009 Power Supply Page Updated options for PIU HW Version 58Amp 35Amp Applicable only for Indoor BTS August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued New AU Window Creating a New AU Updated options for AU Type only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable Removed Ports and Bandwidth parameters August 2009 AL Slot Page Card Properties Tab Updated Required and Installed sections E Updated options for AU Type only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable HM Removed Ports and Bandwidth parameters Added Maintenance Connectivity parameters August 2009 New ODU window ODU number is is 1 28 for Indoor BTS and 1 24 for Outdoor BTS August 2009 ODU Page Removed Heater Existence Removed Enable Tx August 2009 GPS Pag
320. ters Null Reference Service Group Existing service group names The first name in the list 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Uplink Downlink Data Delivery Type UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY UGS Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps 10 40000 Kbps 250 Min Reserved Traffic Rate Kbps 0 40000 250 Cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Traffic Priority 0 7 where 7 is highest 0 Max Latency ms 0 4294967295 500 If data delivery type is ERTVR or UGS the default value should be 90ms Tolerated Jitter ms 0 4294967295 0 Unsolicited Grant Interval ms Uplink 0 65535 20 only Must be lower than Uplink Max Latency Reference Classification Rules UL DL Rule Name Available Classification Rules Null ASN GW Keep Alive Page Enable Keep Alive E Enable Disable check box Disable Polling Period 10 1000 seconds 60 Number of Retransmissions 1 10 3 Retransmission Timeout 5000 10000 milliseconds 5000 BS Create New BS BS ID LSB X X X x 0 255 null Operator ID X X X x 0 255 255 243 41 Once the user enters a new ID it becomes the new default for new BSs Copy BS BS IDLSB X X X x 0 255 The BS ID of the source BS must be changed Operator ID X X X x 0 255 The Operator ID of the
321. tes Received packets that are larger than the configured MTU will be dropped The range is 556 1804 Service VLAN ID Applicable only for VLAN and QinQ service interfaces Configurable only when adding a new service interface The Service Interface VLAN ID parameter The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 A Service Interface VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID and VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management and External Management interaces Shall also not conflict with CVID of any transparent MS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces Configurable only when adding a new service interface The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address Should be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface Subnet Mask Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The subnet mask of the default gateway Should not overlap with an existing Interface subnet host interfaces other service interfaces Enable Checksum
322. th Idle Mode Enable Use the checkbox to enable disable the idle mode feature Note The same idle mode status must be applied for the entire network Paging Group ID The Paging Group ID of the BS Applicable only if Idle Mode is enabled The range is from 0 to 65535 Must be set to a value other than 0 if Idle Mode is enabled Must be unique in the network different Paging Group ID for each BS x NOTE The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz After clicking Apply you may be prompted to properly configure some additional parameters in the Airframe Structure General tab and or the Air Frame Structure Zones tab After configuring the requested parameters click Apply again In addition following any change in the Bandwidth delete the current Distance triggers see Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab on page 241 and redefine them 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 10 2 1 2 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab The Air Frame Structure G
323. th the configured values is added to the table colored green and the parameters editor for the row is displayed on the right side allowing you to configure parameters for the new object After completing configuration of the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The color of the new row will change to black As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters To delete a previously saved row select it and click on the Remove button above the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW amp Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor 4 4 1 3 Managing Tables in Update Multiple Rows Templates Each table in Update Multiple Rows templates includes a single default row enabling to edit the relevant parameters for all rows in the table 4 4 2 ASN GW Template The ASN GW Template comprises the following pages AAA Page Service Group Page QoS Marking Page SFA Page Service Profile Page Keep Alive Page 4 4 2 1 AAA Page The AAA page is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The AAA page comprises the following tabs AAA Client Tab AAA Access Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 4 2 1 1 AAA Cli
324. the basis for the creation of additional sites which are almost identical twins regarding configuration Twin sites are sites for which All managed Objects including instances are the same e g same number and types of AUs BSs ODUs Sectors Services VLANs etc All corresponding parameters of each Managed Object instance have the same values except a limited number of parameters defined to be unique The management system user has to enter these unique parameters values upon creation of a new Duplicate Site configuration file using pre prepared network plan guidelines Whenever a need rises to create a new class of sites the user has to create the first of a kind site using on line configuration tool and then use the Duplicate Site Manager for duplicating it as needed Note that any site created by offline duplication may be used as a basis for duplication without any restriction Using Duplicate Site configuration files the actual creation of a new site requires the following steps 1 Preparing the required Duplicate Site configuration file for the new site including definition of its unique parameter such as Site ID 2 Physical installation of equipment 3 Local provisioning of minimal connectivity and management access configuration see Enabling Discovery on page 1 This step may be skipped in case the next steps are done locally on site 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Drive
325. the following parameters for each entry Parameter Description Type The type of trigger Value The threshold value for the Trigger Action The action to be triggered when the relevant values goes above below the threshold The available options depend on the selected Type Neighbor Applicable only for triggers with Handover Action The neighbor s for whom the rule defined by the previous parameters is applicable General for all neighbors or a specific neighbor from the Neighbor List The Triggers table also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Trigger Adds a new entry to the Triggers table Delete Trigger Deletes one or several selected entries from the Triggers table The Type Action and Neighbor of an existing Trigger entry cannot be modified In existing Triggers entries only the Value can be modified The following table provides description possible Actions and value range for each Trigger Type Trigger Type Possible Actions Trigger Condition Possible Values Own CINR lt Scan Request The CINR at the Serving BS 64 to 63 5 in is below the Trigger steps of 0 5 Handover Request threshold in dB Neighnor CINR gt Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbour 64 to 63 5 in BS is above the Trigger steps of 0 5 threshold in dB 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Si
326. the following types of events Parameter Description Performance Performance management procedures Shelf Shelf management procedures Startup System startup procedures Fault Fault management procedures SW Version Software upgrade procedures Connectivity Connectivity procedures ASN GW ASN GW procedures applicable only in Distributed ASN GW mode Internal AU Manager Internal processes used for managing the AUs 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 _ The Duplicate Site Manager Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager In This Chapter E Twin Site Creation on page 101 E The Twin Site Creation Wizard on page 103 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation 5 1 Twin Site Creation The Duplicate Site Manager provide the ability to duplicate existing site configuration file in order to generate new site s file s x NOTE The Duplicate Site Manager can be used to duplicate a BTS configuration Currently it does not support duplication of a Mini Centralized ASN GW configuration The Twin Site Creation functionality is based on the following assumptions E The customer will use the on line configuration tool to create at least one site configuration file of each class E Each on line site configuration file may be used as
327. ties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Exclusive Warranty With respect to the Software Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may release to its Customers software updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Software updates 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Legal Rights Additional hardware if required to install or use Software updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD Disclaimer a The Software is sold on an AS IS basis Alvari
328. tion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Viewer The Counters Selection Section gt To optimize the value vertical axis of a counter The values scale vertical axis is fixed between 100 to 100 or between O to 100 for a Positive Only graph Some counters may have values that either exceed this range or are too small The value scale of each counter is displayed to the right of the counter s name the default is 1 0 To change the value scale of a counter select it and choose the desired scale from the scale drop down list that will be displayed on the right side of the counter You can use the current graph s value displayed in the Value column next to the Counter s name to identify the required value scale The values displayed for this counter on the graph are the actual counter values multiplied by the scale factor gt To change the polling interval The available options for the Polling Interval are 5 10 20 and 60 seconds The default is 5 seconds Select the required polling interval and click on the Apply button next to it 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Viewer The Graph and Controls Section 7 4 The Graph and Controls Section The graph and controls section contains the graph area used for displaying the selected counters values over time The names and details of the counters that were se
329. to sequential number from 1 to a maximum of 20 Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS marking rule Select an entry to open the QoS Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add QoS Rule Adds a new entry to the Bearer Plane QoS Rules table and opens the QoS Rule Parameters Editor allowing to configure the new rule s parameter Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Note that the default rules Rule Number 1 and 2 cannot be deleted 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 203 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The QoS Rule Parameters Editor displays the following parameters for the new selected rule Parameter Description Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS marking rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The name of an existing rule cannot be modified Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Condition Rule Applied on Interface The type of interface for which the bearer plane QoS rule is defined Internal R4 R6 tunnel External R1 or ANY The Interface type of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow Data Delivery Type The type of service provided as an input parameter for the be
330. topology Select the Distributed Centralized ASN GW topology and click Apply The change will be applied after the next NPU reset IMPORTANT A change in ASN Topology will take effect after next reset x NOTE When the device operates in Centralized ASN Topology all ASN GW pages QoS Marking Rules page and ACL Page are blocked for viewing modifications 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page 6 5 2 Dry Contact Tab applicable only for Indoor BTS The Dry Contact tab enables defining the use of input and output alarms D Site General Dry Contact Time Input alarm Input Number Name Serd Aen Blocking External Equprert External Equipment External Cquipment External Eamet External Equpmert External Cquipment External East External Equpmert SES DCS Output Alsen GI gt Seel e m Dore Figure 6 6 Site Page Dry Content Tab The Dry Contact tab includes the following sections E Inputs Alarm E Output Alarm 6 5 2 1 Inputs Alarm Dry contact input alarms are external devices that are connected to the BTS unit and notify the system when there is a change in external conditions The Inputs Alarm table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Input Number The Input Alarm Number 1 8 Refer to the table below for details on the mapping of Input Ala
331. trol Buttons The following buttons are common to most configuration information pages Button Description Help Opens the Help Navigator and Help Topic Window for the page Ki Q Refresh from Device Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the device Refresh Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the database Apply Implements the modifications to the configuration of the device Exiting the Device Manager or switching to another page without applying discards the changes This button is not available in information pages that display read only details and do not include any configurable parameters 6 1 4 Working with Configuration Tables In some pages tables are used for displaying information and for configuring and managing multiple entities of the same type Grayed out cells are read only To modify the configuration of an existing entity Double click on the applicable cell In a text cell edit the content In some cells a drop down menu will open enabling selection of the required option Click on any other cell to apply the change to the selected cell At this stage the change is applied only to the display and the displayed parameters of the modified entry are colored blue The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button To add a new entity if a
332. uipment 1 8 Failure E Fire E Enclosure Door Open E High Temperature E Flood E Low Fuel E Low Battery Threshold E Generator Failure E Intrusion Detection E External Equipment Failure Send Alarm for Input Number 1 8 H Close Close E Open Blocking for Input Number 1 8 E yes no E no Output Alarm Name for Output Number 1 3 String up to 256 characters null empty string State E on E off off Site Page Time Tab UTC Time and Date The format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy hh between 0 and 23 mm between 0 and 59 ss between 0 and 59 dd mm with usual date and month rules yyyy between 2006 to 9999 N A Local Time Zone HH MM HH 12 to 13 MM 00 or 30 0 00 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Daylight Saving Time Wo 0 Bi M2 in hours Read GPS Time E Hourly Daily E Daily E Monthly E Yearly Read GPS Time At HH MM SS DD MM N A Maximum Number of Satellites for 0 11 1 Sync Loss Minimum Number of Satellites for 1 12 2 Sync Return Stop AU transmission After Maximum Hi TRUE TRUE Time in Holdover State E FALSE L1 L2 Connectivity Page NMS Connectivity Mode E in Band In Band E Out of Band E Unified Site VLAN Configuration Bearer VLAN ID 11 100 110 4094 11 External Ether Type 8100 88A8 910
333. uld be advertised to all neighbors If a pop up message indicating the need for updating neighbors appeared during modification of parameters do not forget to update all neighbors after completing all modifications refer to Neighbor List on page 233 In addition from the navigation tree you can create new BS entities or delete an existing BS entity 6 10 1 Creating Copying Deleting a BS gt To create a new BS 1 Right click the BS node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New BS window BS Mandatory Parameters BS IDLSB Operator ID 255 243 41 ES Figure 6 41 New BS Window 2 Configure the mandatory identification parameters of the BS in the New BS window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS The management system will reject a BS ID LSB already assigned to another BS in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 Operator ID The unique Identifier of the wireless network operator The same Operator ID must be used by all BSs in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 The default Operator ID is 255 243 41 Once the user enters a new I
334. ultiple Configuration Task editor comprises the following fields Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task Equipment Template Use the Browser button to open the Template Selector and select the template you want to use The Equipment Selector table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Name The name of the device as configured in the device SW Version The running SW version of the device IP Address The IP address of the device State The operational state of the device Click Add to open the Equipment Selector allowing you to add objects to the Equipment table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 202 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Multiple Configuration Template Based Task If the MO Type of the selected template is ASN GW or Management the equipment selector includes all eligible BTSs If the MO Type is BS the selector enables selection of eligible BSs Click Remove to remove one or several selected objects from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual 9 Chapter The File Manager Chapter 9 The File Manager In This Chapter E The File Manager on page 306 E Equipment File Manager on page 307 E Duplicate Site File Manager on page 310 4Motion BTS and Mi
335. urable in current 15 minutes release Connectivity Backhaul Port Enable Disable check box Enable Management Port Enable Disable check box Enable Cascade Port Enable Disable check box Enable Internal Ethernet Port Enable Disable check box Enable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Internal Management Interface Enable Disable check box Enable External Management Interface Enable Disable check box Enable Local Management Interface Enable Disable check box Enable ASN GW Bearer Interface Enable Disable check box Enable AAA Client Enable Disable check box Enable Authenticator Enable Disable check box Enable Context Enable Disable check box Enable Data Path Enable Disable check box Enable DHCP Proxy Enable Disable check box Enable DHCP Relay Enable Disable check box Enable DHCP Server Enable Disable check box Enable SFA Enable Disable check box Enable MS State Change Enable Disable check box Enable APCEF Enable Disable check box Enable AU De Registration Enable Disable check box Enable Integrity Enable Disable check box Enable Mobility Enable Disable check box Enable Network Entry Enable Disable check box Enable Traffic Enable Disable check box Enable Utilization Enable Di
336. usly created configuration files available in the database of the source device s The Source Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system BTS Number The device s number Site ID as configured in the device BTS Name The name of the device as configured in the device NE Type The device type IP Address The IP address of the device File Available only for Site Configuration backup task if the selected option is Backup an older device configuration The name of the file to be retrieved from the device Click on the Add button to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Source Equipment table Select the device s to participate in the task right click and select the Select option or double click on a selected single device For Site Configuration backup task if the selected option is Backup an older device configuration a File Name drop down menu for each entry allows you to select the file that will participate in the task Each File Name includes its creation date and time To remove one or several devices from the Source Equipment table select the device s to be removed and click on the Remove button 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 284 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8
337. ust Subscriber ID O vendor Specific Information Name lt 1K ka o L 7 Service interface Name 7 DCP Own IP Address C Offer Reuse Time 5 2 Renewal Tme of Lease Teme C Primary DNS Server O Accounting Mode O fost Croz ID O Agere Remote D C Agere Subscriber ID Unicast Relay Agent Information O Service Type LJ Session Timeme GB Vendor Class Identifier GD Vendor Spectic Information valse 2 Gert Boot File Name Ci it 3g 31 JE M of Refresh v Swe k Figure 4 6 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Add Rows to Tables Template The Service Groups table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Service Group Number The index number of the Service Group 1 10 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Service Group Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the service Group A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The Service Interfaces Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Group Number The index number of the Service Group 1 10 Not applicable for Update Multiple Rows templates Service Group Name Applicable only for Add Rows to Tables templates The name alias of the service Group A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device 4Motion BTS and Mini Ce
338. ve Logging files from selected device s Logging files can later be exported to and used by an external application as part of a debugging procedure The device maintains up to the last three created configuration backup files Configuration backup files are created periodically by the NPU or upon a specific request to backup the current configuration When requesting a backup file you can either create and retrieve the current configuration or retrieve one of the previous backup configuration files available in the NPU gt To open the Backup Task Editor To open the Backup Task Editor do one of the following E In the Equipment Manager select one or several entries right click on the selected entries and select the Backup Configuration option The State of all selected devices must be Up The Backup Task Editor for a new task is displayed with the selected devices automatically included in the Source Equipment table E In the Task Manager window do one of the following To open a new task use the Task Wizard To open an existing task select a Configuration Backup task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task s entry If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is opened displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Backup Task Editor for the selected task is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 282 Device
339. vice NPU IP Address The IP address of the device State The operational state of the equipment Up Down Unreachable Unknown 8 1 3 Actions Tab Performance Collection General Entities Actions WI Collection export Default Folder C AlvariSTAR filesystem SitesFiles Performance OBO D Figure 8 3 Performance Collection Task Editor Actions Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Performance Collection Task The Actions tab enables setting how collected performance data is saved By default the performance data is saved in the management system s file system In addition the performance data xml files can be exported and saved in the client management system s file system To automatically export the collected data to the location indicated in the read only Default Folder text box select the Collection eXport check box 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gei Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Backup Configuration Task 8 2 Backup Configuration Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Configuration Backup Task is applicable only to the managed device The Backup Configuration task enables the retrieval of device s configuration backup file s from selected device s The backup files include copies of all the applicable configuration data and databases in the managed device You can also retrie
340. vice Provisioning Administration SecurRy Management Hep S GR covemene manager x d vecoverr settings x D aa mees x remas x Al stees x El network Mmantensrce x Network Maintenance Management rete gare Target ASN GW IP Address en FEN O ASN GW BTS Number O NEU Management IP Address a pos tents E Network Markensnce Server 10 10 197 117 User odan Figure 3 4 Network Maintenance All MSs De Registration You can select the serving entity by E ASN GW IP Address the Bearer interface IP address of the target device E ASN GW BTS Number the BTS Number of the target device E NPU Management IP Address the IP address of the interface used for managing the site NPU to which the ASN GW is assigned Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option Click Apply to force de registration of all MSs served by the specified device You can click Home to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual 4 Chapter The Template Manager Chapter 4 The Template Manager In This Chapter E The Template Manager on page 25 E Template Modes E The Template Editor on page 29 E The Template Configuration Editor on page 30 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Ma
341. w 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The value of Y that sets the upper limit for the Minimum and Maximum Size parameters depends on the Maximum Cell Radius and Total Uplink Duration parameters using the following formula Y A 3 Total Uplink Duration Extra TTG where A 46 for BW of 5 or 10 MHz and 32 for BW of 7 MHz Table 6 6 Calculating the Upper Limit Value Y for Minimum and Maximum Size Bandwidth MHz Maximum Cell Radius Total Uplink Duration slots Extra TTG symbols 5 10 1 2 4 8 4 6 0 1 2 4 8 15 23 5 7 1 15 23 30 4 6 2 30 5 7 3 7 1 2 4 8 15 23 4 0 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 3 5 1 30 4 2 6 10 2 1 4 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab The Mobility tab enables defining the handover negotiation parameters 4 Basic 255 243 41 5 5 22 General Ak Frome Structure General Ar Frame Structure Zones Moblity value acbon Neighbor Network Update To Neighbors Io Refresh apot Done CH Figure 6 46 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab The Mobility tab includes the following sections 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW E Triggers E Neighbor List 6 10 2 1 4 1 Triggers The Triggers table includes
342. ween the internal frame count and the reported frame number The range is from 0 to 15 Map Major Groups A bit map 6 bits indicationg the major groups allocated to the BS for maps transmission If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant If Segment Number is 0 then bit 0 should be set 1 If Segment Number is 1 then bit 2 should be set 1 If Segment Number is 2 then bit 4 should be set 1 DL Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 31 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description UL Feedback Zone The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone Permutation Base P The valid range is from 0 to 69 UK Data Zone Permutation The permutation base used in the uplink data zone Base The valid range is from 0 to 69 Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW Read only for Transparent Address connectivity mode Click Next to open the next screen of the wizard 5 2 7 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 5 System Managed Network Fault Management Configuration Management Service Provisioning Administration Security Management Help H P gt dl Equipment Manager x ggf Network Maintenance x Template Manager x ol Duplicate site x Twin Si
343. wer aggregate sector throughput Using ER scheduling scheme exposes the system to excessive allocation of air resources to highly active users having relatively poorer channel conditions To 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW nl Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device BS not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW ensure data rate fairness more resources will to be allocated to these users compared to users with relatively good channel conditions The effect of a small number of such users within the sector will be reflected by reduced aggregate sector throughput as well as degradation of achievable rates for all users To protect against abusing users an instantaneous rate threshold can be defined within the scheduling scheme in which the amount of air resources for users with continuous instantaneous rate below the threshold is being limited The more the abusing users instantaneous rate is below the threshold the more resource allocations limitation is applied Three levels of dynamic protection are available E No protection E Low protection level Protection against users with very poor channel conditions Should be used where the abusing users instantaneous rates are far below the average instantaneous rate within the sector E Medium protection Protection against users with relatively poor or very poor channel conditions Should be used where the abusing users instantaneous rates are b
344. when looking for a match Outer DSCP Marking The DSCP value to be used for marking the outer IP header IP GRE The range is 0 63 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic The range is 0 7 4 4 3 4 3 Keep Alive Tab Control Traltic QoS Rules Bearer Traltic QoS rules Keep Abee O Enable Keep alve C Polling Period 5 O Number of Retr aremissions lt O Retransmission Timeout me geben Se R Figure 4 39 The BS Template Connectivity Advanced Page Keep alive Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Configuration Editor The Keep Alive tab is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The Keep Alive tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Enable Keep Alive This parameter enable disable the BS keep alive mechanism The following parameters are applicable only if Keep Alive is enabled Polling Period The period In seconds between polling sessions The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds Polling Period x 1000 value in milliseconds cannot be lower than Retransmission Timeout x Number of Retransmissions 1 Number of Retransmissions Maximum number of retries if Retransmission Timeout has expired without getting a response The range is from 1 to 10 Retransmission Timeout Time in mi
345. wing parameters Parameter Description BTS Number The ID number of the device The BTS Number Site ID is used by the management system as identifier of the device and must be unique in the managed network The range is from 0 to 999999 The default value 0 is not a valid BTS Number it indicates that the BTS Number was not configured and a valid BTS Number must be configured A BTS with Site Number 0 will not be discovered by the management system Since the BTS Number is used by the management system to identify the device it is highly recommended not to modify it If necessary you must follow the BTS Number Change process described below BTS Name The name of the device An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters BTS Location The location of the device e g 21 Main Street 2nd Floor An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 70 characters Product Type A read only description of the product type Locaton in Site and Rack An optional description of the physical location of the device in the site rack A string of up to 32 characters Contact Person The name of the site contact person An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Site Page 6 5 1 2 IMPORTANT BTS Number Site ID Change Process 1 Change the BTS Number
346. xternal NMS connectivity The CSCD port is assigned to the local management VLAN The CSCD port is not applicable for Outdoor BTS Unified When Unified mode is selected the bearer IP domain and external NMS IP domain are unified on the DATA port meaning that the same IP address and VLAN are used to connect to the NMS server AAA server HA and BS The MGMT port and CSCD port are assigned to the local management VLAN in this connectivity mode The CSCD port is not applicable for Outdoor BTS 6 6 1 2 IMPORTANT A change in Connectivity Mode will take effect after next reset Site VLAN Configuration The Site VLAN Configuration section includes the following parameters Parameter Description ID Internal Management VLAN Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The VLAN ID of the internal management interface used for enabling the NMS connectivity between the AU and NPU This parameter is set to 10 and is not user configurable Local Management VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the local management interface used for enabling connectivity with the local NMS server that is connected via the MGMT port or CSCD Cascade port when operating in the in band connectivity mode or via the CSCD port when operating in the out of band connectivity mode This parameter is set to 9 and is not user configurable The CSCD port is not applicable for Outdoor BTS Bearer VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the bearer interface us
347. y D aiper cntAuPortino BH 98 4 1 A Show Legend D aurota cntAuPortinus BW 0 2 1 S D Au Port 9 Lei cntAuPortinm B o 1 BS D Backhaul Port cntauPortingr Mill o 1 i D Management Port I cntAuPortInDi Hill o 1 A D Cascade Port cntAuPortInEr P o 1 8 O Internal Management Z entAuPortinu Ill o 1 e 17 External Management cntauPortout Il 200 1 S O Local Management Int A cntauPortout Ill 0 2 1 a Bearer Interface cntauPortOut Ill 0 4 1 y System Definition Rate Li cntAuPortout Ill 0 2 1 40 D System Definition I cntAuPortout 7 o 1 a St See Z cntAuPortout RB o 1 30 C System Definition 20 O System Definition C System Definition 10 C System Definition C System Definition 0 C System Definition D System Definition 10 C System Definition 17 User Defined Rate Limil 20 C ACL Management B Equipment 20 Shelf C Mu Kn 120 chtAuPortinOctet cntAuPortinUcastPkKt 50 cntAuPortinMulticastPkt cntAuPortinBroadcastPkt 60 cntAuPortinDiscards cntAuPortinErrors 70 cntAuPortinUnknownProtos ontAuPortOutOctet 80 cntAuPortOutUcastPkt cntAuPortOutMulticastPkt op ctAuPortOutBroadcastPkt cntAuPortOutDiscards 100 cntAuPortOutErrors 14 43 30 14 50 30 14 51 30 14 52 30 14 53 30 Print Polling Interval sec S e Apply Stop a e Lei Refresh Done Figure 7 1 Performance Page The Performance Viewer enables on line monitoring of graph s for selected counters The
348. y traffic Minimum Destination Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable for ACL 199 The minimum destination port to which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 Maximum Destination Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable for ACL 199 The maximum destination port to which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 Protocol Applicable only for an extended ACL The transport protocol for which traffic is allowed denied The range is 1 255 In ACL 199 the valid values are 6 TCP and 17 UDP Rule Action The rule action Allow or Drop Not applicable for ACL 199 where it is read only displaying QoS Mark 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Classifier ID Applicable only for ACL 199 The marking classifier ID to be used for associating an action ID that defines the DSCP and ot Priority marking actions to be applied to traffic that meets the rule s parameters A classifier ID cannot be associated with more than one rule Refer to QoS Marking Rules Page on page 149 for details on configuring marking classifiers and marking actions For each Standard ACL a specific combination of all applicable parameters Source IP Address Source IP Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Mask cannot be defined in more than one rule For each Extended AC
349. ysical interface Backhaul port 11 Management and Cascade ports 9 Note the Management and Cascade ports operate always in Transparent Bridging encapsulation mode untagged access mode The VLAN Assigned indicate the IP interfaces attached to these ports VLAN Allowed Read only The IP interface VLAN s allowed on the port Backhaul port E The Bearer VLAN ID E The External Management VLAN ID only in In Band Connectivity Mode Management port E In Band or Unified Connectivity Mode The Local Management VLAN ID 9 E In Out of Band Connectivity Mode The External Management VLAN ID Cascade port The Local Management VLAN ID 9 Max Frame Size The maximum frame size in Bytes not including the Preamble that can be accepted on the Ethernet interface Larger packets will be dropped For the Backhaul interface the range is 1518 9000 bytes For other physical interfaces the following values are supported by the hardware 1518 1522 1526 1536 1552 1664 2048 9022 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 6 6 1 4 Backhaul VLAN Translation The Backhaul VLAN Translation section includes the following option Parameter Description Enable VLAN ID Translation Indicates whether VLAN translation should be enabled or disabled for the Backhaul interface The VLAN Translation table lists the VLAN IDs
350. z E 10MHz 5 MHz Center frequency From f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth null 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Idle Mode Enable Disable check box Disable Paging Group ID 0 65535 0 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab Cell ID 0 31 0 Preamble Group 1 2 a value of 2 is applicable only for certain 1 combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 Segment Number 0 2 0 Frame Number Offset 0 15 0 Total Uplink Duration 4 7 for bandwidth of 5 or 10MHz 3 5 for 6 bandwidth of 7MHz Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab First Zone Minimum Size 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation No Limitation See also recommended values in Section 6 10 2 1 3 Maximum Size 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation No Limitation Cannot be lower than Minimum Size Maximum Map Size 10 20 300 10xN where N 1 30 or No No Limitation Limitation Map Major Groups If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant grayed out If Segment Number is 0 then b
351. zed ASN GW only the None and ASN GW are applicable The ACL table section also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add ACL Adds a new ACL entry to the table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table An ACL with Active State UP cannot be deleted 6 6 5 2 ACL Parameters Section The ACL Parameters section includes the ACL Parameters table and the ACL Parameters Editor After you have created an ACL you can configure Allow Deny rules to be applied for traffic that meets certain criteria The ACL Parameters table displays the following read only parameters for each existing ACL rule Parameter Description Rule Number The ACL rule number An auto sequential number generated during creation of a new rule Rule Action The rule action Allow or Deny Allow indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is allowed to reach the ASN GW and or or AUs Deny indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is dropped and not allowed to reach the ASN GW or AUs 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Select an entry to open the Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule The ACL Parameters table also includes the following buttons Parameter Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Rule Parameters Editor enabling configuration of parameters for the

Device Driver User Manual 4Motion BTS and Mini

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents